Omnii XT15 User Guide

Omnii
HAND-HELD COMPUTER
(Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5)
USER GUIDE
OMNII HAND-HELD COMPUTER
USER GUIDE
8000225-001
Rev. A
April 2015
ii Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
This user manual supports Model Numbers:

7545MBW
7545MBWM
7545MBWP
FCC ID: GM37545MBW, GM37545MBWM and GM37545MBWP
IC: 2739D-7545MBW and 2739D-7545MBWP
Copyright
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means,
without permission in writing from Zebra. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying,
recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an as is basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on
a licensed basis. Zebra grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software
or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be
assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Zebra. No right to
copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall
not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create
a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission
from Zebra. The user agrees to maintain Zebras copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered
hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not
to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any
portion thereof.
Zebra reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.
Zebra does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any
product, circuit, or application described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Zebra, Inc.,
intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in
Zebra products.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are
periodically incorporated into new editions of the publication.
Zebra reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s)
described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages including, but not
limited to, consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented.
Zebra, the Zebra logo, Workabout Pro4 and the names of other products and services provided by Zebra are
trademarks of Zebra.
Windows and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Zebra is
under license.
All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
iii
Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:
Change Date Description
Rev -001a 04/2015 Rebrand for Zebra.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents
About This Manual .......................................................................................................................... xix

Text Conventions ............................................................................................................................ xx
Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer.................................................................................. xx
Regulatory Labels ........................................................................................................................... xxiii
Chapter 1: Basic Operation

Omnii Features ............................................................................................................................... 1-3
Omnii Modules Available ................................................................................................................ 1-5
Preparing the Omnii for Operation .................................................................................................. 1-5
Switching the Omnii On and Off...................................................................................................... 1-6
Resetting the Omnii ........................................................................................................................ 1-7
Performing a Warm Reset..............................................................................................................1-7
Performing a Cold Reset ................................................................................................................1-7
Performing a Clean Start ................................................................................................................1-7
Boot to BooSt..................................................................................................................................1-8
Performing a Hard Reset................................................................................................................1-8
Attaching Carrying Accessories ...................................................................................................... 1-8
Calibrating the Touchscreen ........................................................................................................... 1-8
Imager and Scanner Options .......................................................................................................... 1-9
Connectivity .................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Data Transfer ................................................................................................................................. 1-9
Phone Communication.................................................................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 2: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Operating System ........................................................................................................................... 2-5
Battery Details................................................................................................................................. 2-5
Battery Safety .................................................................................................................................2-5
Battery Swap Time .........................................................................................................................2-5
Charging the Battery ......................................................................................................................2-6
The Keyboard ................................................................................................................................. 2-6
The Power Button (55-Key and 66-Key Keyboards only)..............................................................2-7
vi Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Standard Keys ................................................................................................................................2-7

Modifier Keys ..................................................................................................................................2-8
Activating Modifier Keys...................................................................................................... 2-9
Locking Modifier Keys ......................................................................................................... 2-9
Function Keys and Macro Keys .....................................................................................................2-10
Function Keys ..................................................................................................................... 2-10
Macro Keys ......................................................................................................................... 2-11
Numeric Keyboards Accessing Alpha Keys ..............................................................................2-11
The Keypad Backlight.....................................................................................................................2-12
The Display..................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Adjusting the Display Backlight ......................................................................................................2-12
Calibrating the Touchscreen...........................................................................................................2-13
Screen Orientation .......................................................................................................................... 2-13
Locking the Touchscreen................................................................................................................2-13
Indicators ........................................................................................................................................ 2-14
LEDs ...............................................................................................................................................2-14
Battery Charge Status LED ................................................................................................. 2-15
Operating System Status LED ............................................................................................ 2-15
Radio Status LED................................................................................................................ 2-15
Scanner Status LED............................................................................................................ 2-15
Audio Indicators..............................................................................................................................2-16
Vibrations........................................................................................................................................2-16
Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card ..................................................................................... 2-16
Inserting the Cards .........................................................................................................................2-16
Scanners and Imagers.................................................................................................................... 2-17
Basic Scanner Operations..............................................................................................................2-18
Scanning Techniques .....................................................................................................................2-18
Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations ...............................................................................2-18
Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................................2-19
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners ...........................................................2-19
Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers........................................................................2-19
Navigating in Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 and Applications ............................................. 2-20
Navigating Using a Touchscreen....................................................................................................2-20
Navigating Using the Keyboard......................................................................................................2-20
The Today Screen........................................................................................................................... 2-21
Customizing the Today Screen.......................................................................................................2-22
The Today Screen Default Options ................................................................................................2-22
Pictures ............................................................................................................................... 2-22
Music................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Phone.................................................................................................................................. 2-22
Voicemail............................................................................................................................. 2-22
Time, Date and Alarms ....................................................................................................... 2-23
Text Messages .................................................................................................................... 2-24
E-mail Notification...........................................................................................................................2-26
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments ............................................................................................2-26
Creating and Editing Appointments..................................................................................... 2-27
Deleting Appointments ........................................................................................................ 2-29
Table of Contents vii
Favorites .........................................................................................................................................2-29
Using the Navigation Bar and Hotkeys ........................................................................................... 2-29
The Softkey Bar .............................................................................................................................. 2-31
The Start Button..............................................................................................................................2-31
Managing Files and Folders............................................................................................................ 2-31
Creating a New Folder ...................................................................................................................2-32
Renaming a File .............................................................................................................................2-32
Copying a File.................................................................................................................................2-32
Deleting a File.................................................................................................................................2-33
Using Menus ................................................................................................................................... 2-33
Pop-Up Menus................................................................................................................................2-33
Programs Using Applications....................................................................................................... 2-34
Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 2-35
Kiosk ............................................................................................................................................... 2-36
Data Transfer Between Omnii and a PC ........................................................................................ 2-36
Uploading Data in a Docking Station..............................................................................................2-36
Using Microsoft ActiveSync............................................................................................................2-36
Using Windows Mobile Device Center...........................................................................................2-37
General Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 2-37
Caring for the Touchscreen ............................................................................................................2-37
Cleaning the Omnii.........................................................................................................................2-37
Chapter 3: Programs
Programs ........................................................................................................................................ 3-3
Home .............................................................................................................................................. 3-3
The Phone ...................................................................................................................................... 3-4
The Onscreen Phone Keypad........................................................................................................3-4
Sending & Ending Phone Calls Using the Onscreen Phone Keypad.................................. 3-4
Sending & Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard ........................................................... 3-5
Making a Conference Call................................................................................................... 3-5
Programming Speed Dial .................................................................................................... 3-5
Managing Phone Settings ..............................................................................................................3-8
Text Messages ................................................................................................................................ 3-8
E-mail ............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Folders............................................................................................................................................3-9
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS) ....................................................3-9
Changing Synchronization Settings .................................................................................... 3-10
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7).................................3-11
Sending an E-mail ..........................................................................................................................3-12
Contacts.......................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Working with the Contacts List .......................................................................................................3-13
Communicate Tab - Adding Contacts.............................................................................................3-14
Info Tab ...........................................................................................................................................3-15
Notes Tab ............................................................................................................................ 3-15
Internet Explorer ............................................................................................................................. 3-15
Browsing Web Sites .......................................................................................................................3-15
Calendar ......................................................................................................................................... 3-16
viii Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Alarms............................................................................................................................................. 3-16
Pictures & Videos ........................................................................................................................... 3-17
Using the Camera...........................................................................................................................3-17
Moving Photos to the Omnii ...........................................................................................................3-18
Opening a Photo.............................................................................................................................3-18
Deleting a Photo .............................................................................................................................3-18
Editing a Photo ...............................................................................................................................3-19
Creating a Slide Show ....................................................................................................................3-19
Using the Video Recorder ..............................................................................................................3-19
Windows Media .............................................................................................................................. 3-20
Messenger (Windows Live) ............................................................................................................ 3-20
Windows Live.................................................................................................................................. 3-21
Notes .............................................................................................................................................. 3-21
Creating a Note Using the Soft Keyboard ......................................................................................3-21
Creating and Converting Handwritten Notes to Text......................................................................3-22
Renaming a Note............................................................................................................................3-23
Recording Notes.............................................................................................................................3-23
Task Notification.............................................................................................................................. 3-24
File Explorer.................................................................................................................................... 3-26
ActiveSync .................................................................................................................................. 3-27
Synchronization ..............................................................................................................................3-27
Internet Sharing .............................................................................................................................. 3-27
Creating an Internet Connection ....................................................................................................3-27
Using Internet Sharing....................................................................................................................3-28
Task Manager ................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Search Phone ................................................................................................................................. 3-29
Imager and Camera Demo ............................................................................................................. 3-31
Office Mobile ................................................................................................................................... 3-31
Excel Mobile ...................................................................................................................................3-32
OneNote Mobile..............................................................................................................................3-32
Word Mobile....................................................................................................................................3-36
Text Input Modes................................................................................................................. 3-36
Sharing Documents with your PC ....................................................................................... 3-36
PowerPoint Mobile..........................................................................................................................3-36
SharePoint Workspace Mobile .......................................................................................................3-37
PartnerUp ....................................................................................................................................... 3-37
Kiosk ............................................................................................................................................... 3-37
Modem Link .................................................................................................................................... 3-38
Remote Desktop Mobile ................................................................................................................. 3-38
Connecting to a Terminal Server....................................................................................................3-38
Disconnecting Without Ending a Session ......................................................................................3-39
Ending a Session............................................................................................................................3-39
SIM Toolkit UI.................................................................................................................................. 3-39
WiFiConnect A.R.C......................................................................................................................... 3-39
Chapter 4: Settings
Overview of Software...................................................................................................................... 4-5
Table of Contents ix
Zebra Software Advantage.............................................................................................................4-5

Microsoft Software..........................................................................................................................4-5
Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Clocks & Alarms.............................................................................................................................. 4-6
Lock ................................................................................................................................................ 4-6
Home .............................................................................................................................................. 4-7
Appearance Tab Changing the Theme (Background) ................................................................4-7
Beaming a Theme to Another Device ............................................................................................4-7
Items Tab Customizing the Today Screen...................................................................................4-8
Power.............................................................................................................................................. 4-9
Battery Power .................................................................................................................................4-9
Advanced Tab.................................................................................................................................4-9
Battery Details Tab .........................................................................................................................4-10
Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup ......................................................................4-10
Battery Health.................................................................................................................................4-11
Sound & Notifications...................................................................................................................... 4-12
Sounds Tab.....................................................................................................................................4-12
Notifications Tab .............................................................................................................................4-13
Connections Folder......................................................................................................................... 4-13
Beam ..............................................................................................................................................4-14
Bluetooth Setup ............................................................................................................................4-14
The Devices Tab - Scanning for Bluetooth Devices........................................................... 4-15
Pairing a Device .................................................................................................................. 4-17
Servers Tab ......................................................................................................................... 4-18
Mode Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-19
About Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-20
Paired Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-20
Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone.................................................................................4-21
Connections Connecting to the Internet......................................................................................4-23
Modem Connection Setup..............................................................................................................4-24
Advanced Modem Settings ................................................................................................. 4-25
Domain Enroll .................................................................................................................................4-26
Network Cards................................................................................................................................4-27
Changing Network Card Settings........................................................................................ 4-28
VPN Connection Setup ....................................................................................................... 4-29
Managing an Existing Connection....................................................................................... 4-30
Proxy Server Tab................................................................................................................. 4-31
Selecting a Network .......................................................................................................................4-32
Wi-Fi Config - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio ........................................................................4-33
Wi-Fi Config: Status Tab...................................................................................................... 4-34
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab ................................................................................................ 4-34
Configuring TCP/IP ............................................................................................................. 4-39
Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Tab................................................................................................ 4-41
Wireless Manager...........................................................................................................................4-42
Personal Folder............................................................................................................................... 4-43
App Launch Keys ...........................................................................................................................4-43
Buttons............................................................................................................................................4-45
x Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Program Buttons Tab .......................................................................................................... 4-45

Up/Down Control Tab.......................................................................................................... 4-46
OneShots ............................................................................................................................ 4-46
Macro Keys ......................................................................................................................... 4-47
Unicode Mapping ................................................................................................................ 4-48
Scancode Remapping......................................................................................................... 4-49
Lock Sequence Tab ............................................................................................................ 4-51
The Phone Managing Settings .................................................................................................... 4-51
Phone: Sounds Tab ........................................................................................................................4-53
Phone: Security Tab .......................................................................................................................4-53
Phone: Services Tab.......................................................................................................................4-55
Phone: Network Tab .......................................................................................................................4-55
Phone: Data Tab.............................................................................................................................4-56
Phone: Bands Tab ..........................................................................................................................4-56
Phone: Diagnostics Tab..................................................................................................................4-56
Phone: Hearing Aid Mode Tab .......................................................................................................4-57
System Folder................................................................................................................................. 4-57
About...............................................................................................................................................4-58
Backlight Screen and Keypad .....................................................................................................4-58
Battery Power Tab............................................................................................................... 4-59
External Power Tab............................................................................................................. 4-59
Backlight Tab....................................................................................................................... 4-60
Certificates......................................................................................................................................4-60
Choosing a Certificate......................................................................................................... 4-60
Compass.........................................................................................................................................4-62
Contrast ..........................................................................................................................................4-63
Customer Feedback .......................................................................................................................4-63
Dr. Debug........................................................................................................................................4-63
Status .................................................................................................................................. 4-64
Utilities ................................................................................................................................ 4-64
Motion Meter ....................................................................................................................... 4-65
Settings ............................................................................................................................... 4-65
Encryption.......................................................................................................................................4-65
Error Reporting ...............................................................................................................................4-66
GPS (Global Positioning System) ..................................................................................................4-66
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings ....................................................................................4-68
Imagers Settings............................................................................................................................4-71
Manage Triggers.............................................................................................................................4-72
Trigger Mappings ................................................................................................................ 4-72
Managed Programs........................................................................................................................4-74
Memory...........................................................................................................................................4-74
Main Tab ............................................................................................................................. 4-75
Storage Card....................................................................................................................... 4-75
Microphone .....................................................................................................................................4-75
PartnerUp ......................................................................................................................................4-76
Quick Defrost (Heater Settings) .....................................................................................................4-76
Kiosk ...............................................................................................................................................4-76
Table of Contents xi
Kiosk Menu ......................................................................................................................... 4-77

Administrator Password ...................................................................................................... 4-78
Shell Settings ...................................................................................................................... 4-78
Restrictions.....................................................................................................................................4-83
Control Panel Settings ........................................................................................................ 4-84
Import and Export Settings.................................................................................................. 4-85
Activating a Change User Mode ...................................................................................... 4-87
Regional Settings ...........................................................................................................................4-87
Remove Programs .........................................................................................................................4-88
Scanner Settings ............................................................................................................................4-89
Restoring Default Settings .................................................................................................. 4-89
Options Tab ......................................................................................................................... 4-89
Translations Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-92
Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6)............................................................ 4-93
Screen ............................................................................................................................................4-95
Screen Rotation..............................................................................................................................4-96
System Properties ..........................................................................................................................4-97
Task Manager .................................................................................................................................4-97
Total Recall .....................................................................................................................................4-98
Creating a Backup............................................................................................................... 4-99
Creating a Clone ................................................................................................................. 4-100
Managing Profiles ............................................................................................................... 4-101
Deleting a Profile................................................................................................................. 4-103
TweakIT ..........................................................................................................................................4-103
Advanced Interface and Network Settings .......................................................................... 4-104
Advanced Services Settings ............................................................................................... 4-105
Registry Editor..................................................................................................................... 4-106
Chapter 5: Accessories
Pistol Grips...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Removing the Trigger Cover ..........................................................................................................5-3
Attaching the Pistol Grip.................................................................................................................5-3
Carrying and Protective Accessories ............................................................................................. 5-4
The Hand Strap - Model ST6025 ...................................................................................................5-5
Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090 ....................................................................................5-5
Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055 ...............................................................................................5-5
Power Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 5-6
Snap Modules................................................................................................................................5-6
AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR .....................................................................5-8
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113..............................................................................5-8
Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information..................................................................... 5-9
Important Charger Safety Instructions ...........................................................................................5-9
Charging the Battery ......................................................................................................................5-9
Installation Chargers and Docking Stations...............................................................................5-10
Operator Controls ...........................................................................................................................5-10
Power Consumption Considerations..............................................................................................5-10
xii Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 .............................................................. 5-10

Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii.............................................................................................5-12
Indicators ........................................................................................................................................5-13
Operation .......................................................................................................................................5-13
Charging the Omnii Battery................................................................................................. 5-13
Charging the Spare Battery................................................................................................. 5-13
Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station...........................................................................................5-13
Docking station does not seem to power on. ...................................................................... 5-14
Omnii charge indicator LED stays off.................................................................................. 5-14
Omnii charge indicator LED is red. ..................................................................................... 5-14
Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. ............................................................... 5-14
Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. ........................................ 5-14
Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004 ................................................................................... 5-15
Indicators ........................................................................................................................................5-16
Quad Docking Station Operation....................................................................................................5-16
Charging the Omnii Battery................................................................................................. 5-16
Installation ........................................................................................................................... 5-16
Connecting to the Ethernet Network ................................................................................... 5-17
Cleaning the ST4004......................................................................................................................5-17
Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off................................................................................ 5-18
Power LED Does Not Light Up ........................................................................................... 5-18
Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow ..................................................................................... 5-18
Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red .................................................................................... 5-18
Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off......................................................................................... 5-18
Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 ............................................................................ 5-18
Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations .................................................................................5-19
Insertion and Removal of Omnii.....................................................................................................5-21
Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle.......................................................................................................5-22
ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation..............................................................................................5-22
Wiring Guidelines................................................................................................................ 5-23
Installation in High Voltage Vehicles ................................................................................... 5-23
Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle.................................................. 5-24
Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 ....................................................................................... 5-26
Installation.......................................................................................................................................5-26
Charge Indicators ...........................................................................................................................5-27
Charging Batteries..........................................................................................................................5-27
Improper Battery Storage.................................................................................................... 5-28
Power Self-test LEDs Dont Light Up .................................................................................. 5-28
Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed ................................................................ 5-28
Table of Contents xiii
Appendices
Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Omnii Docking Connector ............................................................................................................... A-3
Snap Modules Connectors.............................................................................................................. A-4
Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 ..................................................................... A-5
Omnii Battery Contacts ................................................................................................................... A-6
Appendix B: Imagers Applet

The Imagers Applet......................................................................................................................... B-3
Required Applets ............................................................................................................................ B-3
Presets ........................................................................................................................................... B-3
Predefined Presets ................................................................................................................... B-3
Barcode Predefined Presets ..................................................................................................... B-3
Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets ........................................................... B-4
Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets ....................................................................... B-4
Image Capture Predefined Presets........................................................................................... B-5
Using the Imagers Applet................................................................................................................ B-5
Configuring the Image Capture Presets.................................................................................... B-5
Selecting a Camera .................................................................................................................. B-6
Setting the Active Preset........................................................................................................... B-6
Viewing a Preset ....................................................................................................................... B-6
Creating a Custom Preset......................................................................................................... B-6
Modifying a Custom Preset....................................................................................................... B-7
Removing a Custom Preset ...................................................................................................... B-8
Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets ...................................................................... B-8
Selecting a Camera .................................................................................................................. B-9
Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies ..................................................................... B-12
Filter Tab Manipulating Barcode Data .................................................................................... B-15
Modifying a Barcode Setting ............................................................................................... B-15
Translation Tab Configuring Rules ......................................................................................... B-16
Case Rules.......................................................................................................................... B-17
Advanced Tab ........................................................................................................................... B-18
File Locations for Captured Images .................................................................................... B-18
Configuring Triggers............................................................................................................ B-18
Barcode Symbologies ..................................................................................................................... B-19
Imager Barcode Symbologies ................................................................................................... B-20
Color Camera Barcode Symbologies........................................................................................ B-21
xiv Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Appendix C: Scanner Settings

Barcode Settings ............................................................................................................................ C-3
Scanner Options ....................................................................................................................... C-3
Restoring Default Settings ........................................................................................................ C-4
Decoded (Internal) Scanners .................................................................................................... C-4
Options................................................................................................................................ C-4
Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options................................................................................ C-5
Decoded (Internal) Data Options ........................................................................................ C-6
Decoded (HHP)......................................................................................................................... C-7
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)......................................................................................................... C-7
Decoded (ISCP) Options .................................................................................................... C-7
Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options ................................................................................... C-7
Non-Decoded Scanners............................................................................................................ C-9
Options................................................................................................................................ C-9
Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

Internal Scanners and Imagers....................................................................................................... D-3
SE955 Scanner............................................................................................................................... D-3
SE955 Decode Zones............................................................................................................... D-3
SE965 Scanner............................................................................................................................... D-4
SE965 Decode Zones............................................................................................................... D-5
SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner ....................................................................................... D-6
SE1224HP Decode Zones........................................................................................................ D-6
SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner......................................................................................... D-7
SE1524ER Decode Zones........................................................................................................ D-7
EV15 Imager................................................................................................................................... D-8
EV15 Imager Decode Zone ...................................................................................................... D-8
EA11 Decoded 2D Imager .............................................................................................................. D-9
EA11 Typical Reading Distances .............................................................................................. D-10
EA20X Imager ................................................................................................................................ D-10
EA20X Typical Reading Distances ........................................................................................... D-11
HHP 5080SR Imager/Decoder ....................................................................................................... D-12
HHP 5080SR Working Range................................................................................................... D-12
SE4500SR Standard Range Imager............................................................................................ D-13
SE4500SR Decode Zone.......................................................................................................... D-15
SE4600LR Long Range Imager............................................................................................. D-16
SE4600LR Decode Zones .................................................................................................. D-18
Appendix E: Omnii Specifications

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) .............................................................................. E-3
Hardware .................................................................................................................................. E-3
Regulatory Approvals................................................................................................................ E-5
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001).............................................................................. E-5
Wireless Radios.............................................................................................................................. E-6
Cinterion, Model MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio .................................................................. E-6
Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio ...................................................... E-7
802.11a/b/g/n Radio.................................................................................................................. E-9
Bluetooth Radio ....................................................................................................................... E-11
xv Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Chapter F: Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants

The Omnii XT15f Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545XT) ............................................................... F-3
Hardware Specifications.................................................................................................................F-4
Regulatory Approvals .....................................................................................................................F-5
The Freezer Keyboards..................................................................................................................F-6
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) for Omnii Chiller Model ........................................ F-6
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh (ST3002) for Omnii Arctic Model ......................................... F-7
Quick Defrost Application ............................................................................................................... F-8
Settings...........................................................................................................................................F-9
Suspend Threshold............................................................................................................. F-9
Scan Window ...................................................................................................................... F-9
Heater Info ......................................................................................................................................F-9
Heater System .................................................................................................................... F-10
Display and Scan Window Heaters..................................................................................... F-11
System Test ........................................................................................................................ F-11
System Properties............................................................................................................... F-12
Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)

Wireless WAN................................................................................................................................. G-3
Navigation Bar Icons....................................................................................................................... G-3
Establishing a Packet Data Connection.......................................................................................... G-3
Disconnecting from a Network .................................................................................................. G-5
Advanced Packet Data Configuration ....................................................................................... G-5
Manually Adding a New Modem Connection ...................................................................... G-5
The Security Tab Entering a PIN...................................................................................... G-7
Bands.................................................................................................................................. G-7
Network Configuration ........................................................................................................ G-8
Hearing Aid ......................................................................................................................... G-8
Appendix H: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines

Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Important Safety & Regulatory Information .................................... H-3
Omnii XT15ni Battery Information................................................................................................... H-4
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
About This Guide xix
About This Manual

This user manual describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the Omnii Hand-Held Computer.
Chapter : About This Guide
provides a basic overview of the Omnii Hand-Held.
Chapter 1: Basic Operation
describes the steps required to get the Omnii ready for operation.
Chapter 2: Getting To Know Your Omnii
describes Omnii features, including how to charge and maintain the battery, the keyboard fea-
tures, the display, using the internal scanner, etc. This chapter also describes how to navigate the
Microsoft Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 Today screen, how to transfer data between the
Omnii and a PC and how to manage files and folders.
Chapter 3: Programs
provides a description of the Microsoft Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 Programs applets
and how to use them.
Chapter 4: Settings
provides details about Microsoft Windows Embedded Hand-Held Settings applets and how to
use them.
Chapter 5: Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Omnii computer.
Appendix A: Port Pinouts
describes pinouts for the Omnii docking connector, snap module connectors, battery contacts,
and vehicle cradle cable connectors.
Appendix B: Imagers Applet
describes in detail the Omnii imager settings.
Appendix C: Scanner Settings
describes the barcode options.
Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications
lists the specifications for the Omnii scanners and imagers.
Appendix E: Omnii Specifications
lists the specifications for your Omnii computer, radios, and battery.
Appendix F: Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants
provides specifications for the Omnii XT15f freezer variants and the Arctic freezer battery
(ST3002). In addition, the Quick Defrost applet is described here.
Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
provides WWAN configuration information.

xx Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Appendix H: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines
lists the approvals, important warnings, and cautions for the Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive)
Hand-Held Computer.
Text Conventions
NOTE Notes highlight additional helpful information.
IMPORTANT These statements provide particularly important instructions or

additional information that is critical to the operation of the
equipment.
WARNING These statements provide critical information that may prevent

physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.
Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a modular, industrial hand-held computer. A variety of options are available
to suit applications in courier/delivery, field service, manufacturing facilities, material handling applications in
warehouses, ports and yards, with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. Barcode input methodolo-
gies are supported by a variety of available scanners. Optimization for specific operational environments is
also supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.
The Omnii XT15f (Freezer Variant) combines modularity, customizability and performance with added tech-
nology to resist condensation for use in cold, condensing environments. For details, see Appendix F: Omnii
XT15f Freezer Variants.
NOTE The Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Zebra approved carrying case. Use of
non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
NOTE For product specifications, refer to Appendix E: Omnii Specifications.
Model Variants
Omnii RT15 Hand-Held Computer (rugged) Model 7545XC
Omnii XT15 Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged) Model 7545XA
Omnii XT15f (Freezer Variants) Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged) - Model 7545XT
Processor and Memory

Texas Instruments AM3715 Sitara (OMAP3 compatible), ARM Processor 800 MHz.
RAM: 512 MB.
Flash ROM: 1 GB.
About This Guide xxi
Operating System
Microsoft Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5
Bundled Applications
Internet Explorer Mobile
Windows Office Mobile 2010, includes Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote & SharePoint
Windows Office Outlook Mobile
Windows Media Player Mobile
Supported Applications
Open TekTerm.
Stay-Linked Terminal Emulation.
Naurtech Browser.
Naurtech Terminal Emulation.
NetMotion Mobility XE VPN.
Device Management and Utilities

Kiosk.
Mobile Control Centre (MCC).
Total Recall, TweakIt, Dr. Debug.
User Interface
Colour/Touch Display 9.4 cm (3.7 in) diagonal
- VGA (640 x 480) Transflective.
- High visibility option: superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd/m2 brightness.
- Extreme Duty option: withstands 1.25 Joule impact, superior low temperature operation (to -20 C/-4
F), with 160 cd/m2 brightness. Better abrasion resistance.
Touchscreen
- Passive stylus or finger operation; pan and flick gestures supported.
- Signature capture.
Keyboards
- Large selection of backlit keypads in both alpha and numeric formats. For a list of currently
available keyboard configurations, consult your Zebra representative, or go to:
http://www.Zebra.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Psion/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_p_handheld
Voice, Audio & Feedback
- High volume beeper: 95 dBA.
- Integrated microphone and speaker.
- Optional Push-to-Talk Speaker.
- Vibration feedback.
- Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk VoIP over Wi-Fi or WWAN.
xxii Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Wireless Connectivity
Integrated Bluetooth V2.0 + EDR.
Onboard IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n Wi-Fi (CCX V4 Pending) radio.
Bluetooth coexistence.
Optional SIRF III GPS Receiver.
Optional 2.5 G GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio.
Optional UMTS 3.8 G HSPA+ radio
NOTE 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.
The following figures illustrate the main features of the Omnii for detailed views, please see Omnii
Features on page 1-3.
Figure 1 Omnii XT15 and Omnii RT15 Variants
Omnii XT15 Omnii RT15

59-key ABC keyboard 55-key ABC keyboard
Figure 2 Bottom View (Docking Connector)

About This Guide xxiii
Figure 3 Top View (Scanner Window)
Laser Aperture
Figure 4 Omnii XT15f Freezer Variant
NOTE For details about the Omnii XT15f freezer units, refer to Appendix F: Omnii
XT15f Freezer Variants
Omnii XT15f Omnii XT15f

34-key numeric keyboard 58-key alphanumeric keyboard
Regulatory Labels
WARNING Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than

those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
xxiv Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Figure 5 Laser Warning Label
MODEL No:
LASER RADIATION
7545 DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT (IEC)
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT (CDRH)
1003838A
650-680nm LASER DIODE
Max.Output:1.4mW (SCAN ) <1mW(AIM)
IEC60825-1:2007 (2nd Edition)
This label is affixed below the scanner window.
Figure 6 SE955 Laser Warning Label
MODEL No:
LASER RADIATION
7545 DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT (IEC)
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT (CDRH)
1003853A
650-680nm LASER DIODE
Max. Output:1.9mW (SCAN)<1mW (AIM)
This label is affixed below the scanner window.
Figure 7 SE965 and SE4500 Laser Warning Label
Figure 8 LED Radiation Notice Label
This product contains an imager

that uses an LED light source
MODEL No: LED RADIATION
1003837A
7545 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT (IEC)

CLASS I LED PRODUCT (CDRH)
Figure 9 SE4600 Laser Warning Label
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
CLASS 2 LASER/LED PRODUCT
1003923

IEC62471:2006
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION 1
Omnii Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Omnii Modules Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Documents Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Preparing the Omnii for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Switching the Omnii On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Resetting the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Performing a Warm Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Performing a Cold Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Performing a Clean Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Boot to BooSt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Performing a Hard Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Attaching Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Imager and Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Phone Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Basic Operation 1 - 3
Omnii Features
Figure 1-1 Front View of the Omnii XT15 Model with Alphanumeric Keyboard
Speaker
LEDs Beeper
Display
Scan key
Microphone
Symbol Modifier key FN Modifier key
ENTER/Power key
1-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Figure 1-2 Side Views of the Omnii XT15
Right Side Left Side
Volume
rocker button
Vertical
scroll button
Scan button
ENTER button
Battery release button
Side rail
Slot for snap module arm
Figure 1-3 Bottom View
2 2
1 Docking Connector 3 3
2 Alignment Pin Holes
3 M2.5 Locking Screws
(for firmly attaching devices) 4
4 Hand Strap Slot
Figure 1-4 Top View
Laser
aperture
End-cap
Figure 1-5 Back View
Rear PTT speaker Camera aperture

(optional) Scanner window
Scanner pod
Expansion back
Pistol grip
attachment screws (4)
Battery pack
Omnii Modules Available

To see a current list of Omnii accessories and modules, go to the Zebra website at:
http://www.zebra.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Psion/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_p_handheld
Documents Available
To see a current list of documents and download what you need, go to the Knowledge Base on the Zebra Inge-
nuity Working community website:
http://www.ingenuityworking.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/product-manuals.aspx
Preparing the Omnii for Operation

The Battery
The Omnii is powered by a Lithium-ion Smart Battery pack, 5000 mAh Model ST3001.
IMPORTANT Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the battery
safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory &
Warranty Guide (PN 8000191).
Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully charged prior to
use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information, see
Battery Details on page 2-5.
Replacing the Battery Pack
IMPORTANT Always switch the unit off before changing the battery (see Switch-
ing the Omnii On and Off on page 1-6). However, assuming the
default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not
been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes you
will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.
Figure 1-6 Omnii Battery
Battery top
1 2
Contacts
1
1 - Release Button 3
4
2 - Battery Compartment
3 - Guide Tabs
3 Battery bottom
4 - Release Button Tabs 3
NOTE If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an
uncharged battery and use the device while the battery charges.
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, a battery can
be removed for up to 4 minutes without losing data. After 4 minutes the hand-held may reboot.
Removing the Battery Pack

If your unit is equipped with a hand strap, unhook it from the base of the battery.
Press the two latch buttons at the sides of the compartment simultaneously, and slide the battery out.
Installing the Battery Pack
Slide the charged battery with the contoured plastic facing you into the unit with the contacts matching
position and the guide tabs moving into the corresponding slots at the base of the compartment. Firmly
click both sides of the battery into place.
If your computer is equipped with a hand strap, re-attach the clip to the slot at the base of the battery.
Switch the unit on (see Switching the Omnii On and Off on page 1-6).
Switching the Omnii On and Off

Follow the instructions below for your Omnii.
Switching the Omnii On

Press and hold the [Power] button down for at least one second.
When the unit is turned off, normally it automatically enters a power-saving, suspend state. When the Omnii
is switched on from the suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you
were working prior to turning the computer off.
IMPORTANT If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting
options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C), a non-Zebra battery may be

installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend
Threshold. See Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup on
page 4-10 for details.
To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.
However, if you supply AC power to the Omnii with a battery that falls below
the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.
Switching the Omnii Off

To switch off the Omnii, press the [Power] button. The Omnii will automatically enter the Suspend state.
IMPORTANT Turning off the hand-held does not result in a complete shutdown; rather,
the unit enters a power-saving, suspend state. When the Omnii is turned
on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.
Resetting the Omnii

To perform a variety of Omnii resets, you can use the keyboard shortcuts described below.
Performing a Warm Reset

During a warm reset, running programs are halted. The contents of the file system, Flash Disk, and the registry
are preserved. Keep in mind, however, that RAM content is not preserved.
Press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Power] button simultaneously for a minimum of
four seconds.
NOTE For radio specifications, switching from Windows Zero Config to WiFi Config
(DeviceScape) and visa versa requires a warm reset.
Performing a Cold Reset

A cold reset reinitializes all hardware. All RAM including the RAM disk is erased. Non-volatile storage such as
the Flash disk is preserved, as is the file system.
To execute a cold reset:
Press and hold down the [SYM] key, the [FN] key, and the [Power] button, simultaneously for a
minimum of four seconds.
Performing a Clean Start

A clean start returns the Omnii to factory settings, flushes the registry keys and deletes volatile storage.
Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [Power] button and the [SCAN] key simultaneously for a minimum
of six seconds.
The Omnii displays the Boot to BooSt menu.
On an alpha keyboard, type .clean.

On a numeric keyboard, type .25326.
Boot to BooSt
If you choose Boot to BooSt, the BooSt menu is loaded.
Press and hold down the [FN] key, [Power] button and [SCAN] key for a minimum of four seconds.
Press [1] to launch the OS.
Performing a Hard Reset
IMPORTANT This procedure is recommended as a last resort, when all other

methods fail.
To execute a hard reset:

Remove the battery.
Using a coin, or other conductive item, connect pins 5 and 6 of the Omnii battery contacts for at least six
seconds.
Pin 6 Pin 5
Replace the battery and power the Omnii on. The computer will boot as if from a cold reset.
Attaching Carrying Accessories

Zebra recommends that a carrying accessory a hand strap be installed on the Omnii before use. For
detailed information, see Carrying and Protective Accessories on page 5-4.
Calibrating the Touchscreen

The Omnii touchscreen feature is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touchscreen's
operating parameters may change, and it may need to be recalibrated for correct operation. Refer to Cali-
brating the Touchscreen on page 2-13 for details.
Imager and Scanner Options

If your Omnii is equipped with an internal imager or scanner, review the relevant sections: Appendix B:
Imagers Applet and vAppendix C: Scanner Settings for details.
Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications lists their current model numbers, descriptions,
and specifications.
Connectivity
For information on connecting the Omnii to a PC, refer to Data Transfer Between Omnii and a PC on
page 2-36.
The Omnii contains an integrated 802.11a/b/g/n radio module. The Wi-Fi Config application is used to
configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles. To configure the radio, follow the steps outlined
under the heading Wi-Fi Config - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio on page 4-33.
The Omnii is also available with one of the following Wireless WAN radio options: the Cinterion MC75i EDGE
or the Cinterion PH8-P HSPA+. Refer to Wireless Radios on page E-6 in Appendix E: Omnii Specifications
for full specifications. With either of these radios and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data (see
Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)), and you can use the Omnii voice option to place phone
calls (refer to The Phone on page 3-4 and The Phone Managing Settings on page 4-51).
To configure your Bluetooth settings, go to Bluetooth Setup on page 4-14.
If you have a GPS (Global Positioning System) module, you can choose from a set of GPS profiles built into
the modem and set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System). See GPS (Global Positioning System)
on page 4-66.
Data Transfer
Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC. Various
options exist depending on whether you are using Windows XP or earlier, Windows Vista or Windows 7. For
connection details, refer to Data Transfer Between Omnii and a PC on page 2-36.
Phone Communication
If the Cinterion MC75i EDGE WWAN or Cinterion PH8-P HSPA+ radio modem is installed and enabled, the
Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear when you tap on the navigation bar at the top of the
screen. The 55-key and 66-key keyboards are also equipped with [Talk] and [End] phone keys. For details
about using the phone options, refer to The Phone on page 3-4 and The Phone Managing Settings on
page 4-51.
NOTE The voice option is not available in North America for the Cinterion MC75i EDGE radio.
CHAPTER 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
OMNII
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR OMNII 2
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Battery Swap Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
The Power Button (55-Key and 66-Key Keyboards only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Function Keys and Macro Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Numeric Keyboards Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Screen Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Locking the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Battery Charge Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Operating System Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Radio Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Scanner Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Inserting the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Scanners and Imagers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Navigating in Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Navigating Using a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Navigating Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
The Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Customizing the Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
The Today Screen Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Time, Date and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
E-mail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Creating and Editing Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Deleting Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Using the Navigation Bar and Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
The Softkey Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
The Start Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Managing Files and Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Creating a New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Renaming a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Copying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Using Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Programs Using Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Kiosk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Data Transfer Between Omnii and a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Using Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Caring for the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 - 3
Cleaning the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Operating System
Battery Details
Omnii Hand-Held Computers operate by lithium-ion battery packs, Model ST3001.
Review the following sections for detailed battery information:
Installation: Preparing the Omnii for Operation on page 1-5.

Power settings: Power on page 4-9.
Chargers and docking stations: Chapter 5: Accessories.
Specifications: Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) on page E-5.
Contact pinout: Omnii Battery Contacts on page A-6.
Battery Safety
IMPORTANT Before attempting to install, use, or charge the battery pack, it is crit-
ical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the
quick reference guide entitled Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regula-
tory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000191.
Battery Swap Time

Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap
time is a minimum of 4 minutes you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.
To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally on a USB memory
stick or on a PC. You can also save data in the Flash Disk partition of the file system.
Refer to Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup on page 4-10 for details about reserving battery
power for data backup purposes.
The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the battery capacity at
which the Omnii will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the unit will run until
the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum
Backup Time, the Omnii shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer
period of time.
IMPORTANT If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C), a non-Zebra battery may be

installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend
Threshold. See Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup on
To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.
However, if you supply AC power to the Omnii with a battery that falls
below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.
Charging the Battery

Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs
must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking
stations. For detailed information about these accessories, please see Chapter 5: Accessories.
Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery
from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity.
% Charge Completed During Sleep Mode While Operating

100% 4 hrs. 8 hrs.
75% 2 hrs. 6 hrs.
IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge
process until the battery temperature is between 0C to 45C (32F
to 113F).
The Keyboard
The Omnii can be ordered with a wide variety of Alpha and Numeric keyboard layouts. See:
http://www.Zebra.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Psion/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_p_handheld
for a list of available configurations. Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop
computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, those differences are described
in the following sections.
Depending on the type of keyboard on your Omnii, the keyboard is equipped with a dedicated [Power] button
or an [ENTER/Power] combination key both of which allow you to switch the unit on.
The [BLUE/FN] modifier key provides access to additional keys and system functions. These functions are
colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys.
NOTE Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements.

Figure 2-1 Keyboard Layouts
[Power] button
[SCAN]
[End] key
[SYM] Modifier key
[Talk] key
[FN] Modifier key
[ENTER/Power] key
[SHIFT] Modifier key
[Windows] key
36-Key Numeric 123 Keyboard 55-Key Long Alphanumeric Keyboard
The Power Button (55-Key and 66-Key Keyboards only)

The [Power] button in the upper right corner of the keyboard switches the unit on and off.
Standard Keys
The [ENTER/Power] Key
The [ENTER/Power] key is used to execute the usual Enter keyboard functions as well as to power the unit on
and off for keyboards not equipped with a dedicated [Power] button (for details, refer to Switching the Omnii
On and Off on page 1-6).
NOTE 55-key and 66-key keyboards are equipped with a [Power] button. For these key-
boards, the [ENTER] key does not switch on the unit.
The [SHIFT] Key

The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and to provide access to other symbols and
functions on the numeric keyboards. Press the [SHIFT] key to turn the shift state 'on' (it will be represented in
the shift-state indicator in the navigation bar at the top of the screen), then press another key to access the
shifted function of that key.
Press the [SHIFT] key twice to lock the shift state on (the shift-state will be outlined in a black frame to indicate
it is locked on). Press [SHIFT] again to turn the shift state off.
To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is
displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] + [SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS
LOCK mode off.
The Arrow Keys

The [Arrow] keys are located near the top of the keyboard, and are represented on the keyboard as triangles
pointing in different directions. The [Arrow] keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the
arrow: up, down, left and right. The left arrow key should not be confused with the [BACKSPACE] key which is
depicted as a left arrow. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next
character you type will appear.
The [BACKSPACE/DEL] Key

The [BACKSPACE] key (represented on the keyboard as an arrow pointing left) moves the cursor one char-
acter to the left, erasing the previous key stroke.
The [DEL] key ([FN] +[BACKSPACE]) erases the character at the current cursor position.
The [CTRL] and [ALT] Key

The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent.
Pressing either key twice locks it 'on'. Pressing the key once again unlocks it.
The [TAB] Key

Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.
The [ESC] Key

Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box, or activity.
The [SPACE] Key

The [SPACE] key is represented on the keyboard by a long, horizontal line bracketed by a small vertical line on
each side. Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the
[SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.
The [SCAN] Key

The Omnii is equipped with a single [SCAN] key on the keyboard and an extra [SCAN] button located on the
left side of the unit. [SCAN] keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these
keys can be remapped to serve other functions.
Modifier Keys
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] keys are modifier keys that change the function of the next
key pressed.
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded
(two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose func-
tion you want modified.
[SHIFT] and [FN]

The [SHIFT] and [FN] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions. The functions
related to these modifier keys are colour-coded in white and blue print respectively above the keyboard keys,
dependant on your keyboard format.
[SYM]
NOTE When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (PN 8100016), note
that the [SYM] key is interchangeable with the [ORANGE] key.
The Symbol [SYM] modifier key provides access to commonly used symbolic characters. Pressing the [SYM]
key brings up the Symbol soft input panel (SIP) onscreen keyboard, with symbols mapped to each key.
NOTE Modifier keys are remapped using the Scancode Remapping applet. The Symbol
SIP will automatically display and use the new mappings after the next reboot.
The onscreen keyboard corresponds to the specific keyboard on your Omnii either numeric or alphanu-
meric. The sample below reflects an alphanumeric keyboard layout.
Figure 2-2 Symbol Soft Input Panel
55-Key Alpha Keyboard
Activating Modifier Keys

When a modifier key is pressed, it is represented in the shift-state indicator icon in the navigation bar at the top
of the screen, making it easier to determine whether or not a modifier key is active. For example, when the blue
[FN] key is pressed, it is represented in blue in the shift-state indicator icon at the top of the screen.
Figure 2-3 Shift-State Indicator Icon
Shift-state indicator icon
Locking Modifier Keys

When a modifier key is locked on, it will remain active until it is pressed again to unlock or turn it off.
To help you identify when a modifier key is locked on, the key is represented in the shift-state indicator icon
with a black frame around it.
2 - 10 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Figure 2-4 Shift-State Indicator Icon Locked/Unlocked Modifier Key
Unlocked modifier key indicator
Locked modifier key indicator
Once a modifier key is unlocked or turned off, it is no longer displayed in the shift-state indicator icon.
NOTE The locking function of the modifier keys can be changed so that pressing a
modifier key once will lock it on.
If you disable the One Shot function of the key, pressing it once will lock the
key on. Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it off. Refer to
OneShots on page 4-46 for details.
Function Keys and Macro Keys

In addition to the standard keyboard functions, the Omnii supports function keys and macro keys.
All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application. The Open TekTerm application
utilizes these keys (for detailed information, see the Open TekTerm Software User Manual, PN 8000073).
Function Keys
Function keys perform special, custom-defined functions within an application. These keys are accessed by
pressing one of the dedicated function keys on the keyboard, or through the appropriate [SHIFT] or [FN] key
sequence, depending on the keyboard variant being used.
Alphanumeric Keyboard Function Keys

The alphanumeric keyboards are equipped with up to thirty function keys, including those function keys that
are colour-coded in blue print above the alpha keys or function keys (depending on your keyboard).
To access the blue function keys, press the [FN] key followed by the appropriate alpha or function key.
Function keys [F1] through [F24] can be used with the Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 operating system
or another application. The additional function keys, [F25] through [F30] along with the macros, are not used as
part of the Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 operating system.
Numeric Keyboard Function Keys

The numeric keyboards are equipped with up to 24 function keys, including those function keys that are
colour-coded in white print above the function keys. Function keys F25 through F30 can only be accessed by
remapping another key to that function.
To access the white function keys, press the [SHIFT] key followed by the appropriate function key.
Macro Keys
IMPORTANT Refer to Macro Keys on page 4-47 for details about creating macros.
Several of the Omnii keyboards are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace
frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like the [ENTER/Power] key, the
[BACKSPACE] key, any function key and arrow key, etc.
59-Key Alphanumeric Keyboard Macro Keys

These keyboards have six macro keys: [M1] to [M6], located on the S to X keys (second-last row of keys).
To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key.
36-Key Numeric Keyboard Macro Keys

These keyboards are equipped with five macro keys: [M1] to [M5]. These keys are colour coded in blue print
above function keys [F1] to [F5].
To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key. To create a macro, refer to Macro Keys
on page 4-47.
Whether your keyboard does or does not have macro keys physically stamped on the keyboard, up to 15
macro functions can be added using the Scancode Remapping function. Refer to Scancode Remapping on
page 4-49 for details about mapping keys.
Numeric Keyboards Accessing Alpha Keys

On Numeric Omnii keyboards, all alphabetic characters are printed on the unit plastic in blue typeface above
the keys. Alpha characters are accessed by pressing the [FN] modifier key, then pressing another key on the
keyboard.
Alpha Modified Numeric 789 keyboards have each blue alphabetic character assigned as a single [FN]-shifted
character on individual keys.
Numeric 123 keyboards have telephone-style alphabetic keys, with the blue alphabetic characters located in
groups of 3 or 4 above each of the numeric keys. To access characters on these keyboards, a few extra steps
are needed, as described below.
Choosing a Single Alpha Character
NOTE The following examples assume that the [FN] key is enabled as Lock mode in
the One Shot screen (accessed by choosing Start>Settings>Personal>Buttons
icon). In Lock mode, pressing the [FN] key once locks it on. Refer to One-
Shots on page 4-46 for details.
The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in blue characters above the
numeric key [2] on a 36-Key Long Numeric 123 keyboard.
IMPORTANT The letters you choose appear in the shift-indicator icon at the top of
the screen, providing a visual indicator of which letter will be dis-
played on the screen.
To choose the letter a:
Press the [FN] key, and press the numeric key [2].
Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off.
NOTE To choose the second, third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key,
you may want to lock the [FN] key on. Remember that depending on how your
Omnii is set up in the One Shots tab, you may find that you need to press the
[FN] key twice to lock it on. Refer to OneShots on page 4-46 for details.
To choose the letter b:
Lock the [FN] key on, and press [2] twice.

To choose the letter c:
Lock the [FN] key on, and press [2] three times.
NOTE Keep in mind that there is a timeout of one second between key presses when
sequencing through the alphabetic characters on a key. If you pause longer
than one second between key presses, the alphabetic character that is dis-
played at that time will be entered.
Selecting Uppercase Letters

To display a single capital letter, press the [SHIFT] key first, then the letter you want.
To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is
displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] + [SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS
LOCK mode off.
The Keypad Backlight

The intensity of the keypad backlight can be configured using the Backlight icon accessed by tapping on
Start>Settings>System>Backlight. Refer to Backlight Screen and Keypad on page 4-58 for details about
this option.
NOTE Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
The Display
The Omnii is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The back-
light switches on when a key is pressed.
Adjusting the Display Backlight

To set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain on, youll need to choose the
Backlight icon.
Tap on Start>Settings and then, tap on System>Backlight icon.
Refer to Backlight Screen and Keypad on page 4-58 for details.

Calibrating the Touchscreen

If your touchscreen has never been aligned (calibrated) or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate
when you tap on an item, follow the steps below.
Tap on Start>Settings>System. Tap on the Screen icon.
The General tab is displayed in which you can correct alignment and choose screen orientation (see Screen
Orientation on page 2-13 for details).
Tap on the Align Screen button, and follow the directions on the screen to align (calibrate) the screen.
NOTE This window provides two additional tabs: ClearType and Text Size. Tapping on
the ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to smooth screen
font appearance. The Text Size tab allows you to increase or decrease the size
of the font displayed on the screen.
Screen Orientation
In addition to screen calibration, the Screen icon allows you to determine how your screen will be oriented
portrait or landscape (right- or left-handed).
Tap on Start>Settings>System icon.

Tap on the Screen icon.
In the General tab, tap on the orientation that best suits the way in which you use your Omnii.
NOTE For information about screen rotation, refer to Screen Rotation on page 4-96.
Locking the Touchscreen

If you need to lock your touchscreen to protect against accidental actions:
At the Today screen, tap on the Start icon.

Tap on the Lock icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. A sliding lock is displayed on
the screen.
Sliding lock
Lock icon
Place the stylus on the sliding lock, flick it to the right and release to unlock the touchscreen and display
the screen options.
Indicators
The Omnii uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages, vibrations, and audio tones as indicators.
LEDs
The Omnii is equipped with four coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these LEDs indicate.
IMPORTANT If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious as

this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active
laser emission.
Figure 2-5 LED Status Indicators
1 2 3 4
1. Battery Charge Status

2. Operating System Status
3. Radio Status
4. Scanner Status
Battery Charge Status LED

The far left LED is reserved for battery charge status. This indicator is active even when the hand-held
is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be
detected easily.
Charge LED Behaviour Function

OFF External power not detected.
Solid Green Battery charging complete.
Flashing Green Charge in progress.
Yellow Cell temperature out of range for charge.
Solid Red Unable to charge battery.
Operating System Status LED

The second LED indicates system notifications and operating system status. It is also available for user-loaded
custom Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 applications.
Operating LED Behaviour Function

OFF when unit is in Suspend or Normal operating status.
Shutdown.
Solid Yellow The unit is powering on.
Fast Flashing Yellow The unit is entering Suspend mode.
Flashing Yellow This is application dependent.
Radio Status LED

The third LED from the left the blue LED indicates that the GPS radio is enabled or that the WWAN radio is
enabled.
Radio Traffic LED Behaviour Function

OFF The radio is disabled.
Slow Flashing Blue The radio is enabled and active.
Scanner Status LED

The fourth (far right) LED indicates scanner status.
Scan LED Behaviour Function

OFF The scanner is not in use.
Solid Red during scan Scan in progress.
Solid Green after decode Successful scan.
OFF when scan ended

Flashing Red Unsuccessful scan.
Audio Indicators
The Omnii supports several audio options, including Bluetooth. The optional rear speaker can be used for
system (Windows) sounds and .wav files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front
receiver. The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound to signal a number of
events such as screen taps, notifications, and so on. The volume rocker button is located on the left side of the
hand-held. Information on configuring sounds is detailed in Sound & Notifications on page 4-12.
Vibrations
You can set the Omnii to vibrate when a successful or unsuccessful barcode scan is performed. See Good
Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep on page 4-91.
Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card

There are two slots available in the battery compartment the lower slot is provided for a microSD (Secure
Digital) card, which provides additional non-volatile memory to your Omnii, and the upper slot is for a SIM
(Subscriber Identity Module) card, which allows access to the Voice option, access to the Internet, and so on.
microSD Card Slot
OPEN
SD Cover LOCK
SIM Card Slot
Inserting the Cards

Switch off the power to the Omnii.
Remove the battery.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the SD cover screw. Flip the cover open or remove it.
For a microSD card:
Slide the microSD card door to the left to unlock it. Flip it open.
Slide the microSD card into the guides on the SD card door.
Close the microSD card door, and slide it to the right to lock it.
Micro
For a SIM card:
Slide the SIM card metal door latch to the right to unlock it, then flip the door open.
Slide the card into the guides on the SIM card door.
Swing the hinged door back down into place, and slide the metal door latch to the left to lock it.
LOCK
OPEN
Scanners and Imagers
IMPORTANT It is critical that you review the Laser Warnings in the Omnii
Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191)
before using any of the scanners described in this chapter.
For detailed scanner specifications and decode zone tables, refer to

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications.
NOTE To enable a newly-installed imager or scanner, press and hold down the [FN]
key and the [ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three sec-
onds. If your unit has a [Power] button, press and hold down the [FN] key and
the [Power] button for a minimum of three seconds.
The Omnii supports a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements.
Refer to the following sections for detailed information:
Scanner list and specifications: Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications.
Configuration: Scanner Settings on page 4-89 and Manage Triggers on page 4-72.
Scanning Techniques outlines the mechanics of a successful scan.
Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations details how to interpret whether or not a barcode has been
successfully scanned.
Barcode Parameters: Appendix C: Scanner Settings.
Imager Settings: Appendix B: Imagers Applet.
Troubleshooting provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail.
Scanner types include:
Long Range: reads large 1D barcodes (55 mil) at long distances (up to 3 m).
Standard Range/High Performance: reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55 mil) at
medium distances (up to 1m).
Extended Range: reads regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55 mil) at short to medium distances (1 m), as well as
large 1D barcodes (e.g. 55 mil) at long distances.
1D Imager: reads regular 1D and PDF417 barcodes at short to medium distances.
EA11 2D imager: reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes.
Smallest barcode at 5 mil with a minimum read distance to 2.8 inches and a maximum read distance of 5.1
inches; largest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 3.1 inches and a maximum distance of
32.4 inches.
EA20X 2D imager: reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes.
Smallest barcode at 6 mil with a minimum read distance of 6.1 inches and a maximum read distance of 9.1
inches. Largest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 5.1 inches and a maximum read dis-
tance of 49.2 inches.
SE4600LR imager: captures digital images for transmission to a decoder to decode a barcode of any
format supported by the decoding software. Uses laser aiming, LED illumination, and CMOS sensors to
capture barcode images over an extended range and under a wide variety of lighting conditions.
Basic Scanner Operations

Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until
a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
Scanning Techniques
Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the barcode.
Do not hold the scanner directly over the barcode. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanners
exit window and prevent a successful decode.
Scan the entire barcode. If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner, make certain that the scan beam
crosses every bar and space on the barcode, including the margins on either end of the symbol.
If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark is centered within
the barcode you want to scan.
When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the barcode. Movement blurs
the image.
Hold the scanner farther away for larger barcodes.
Hold the scanner closer for barcodes with bars that are close together.
Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations

The scanner LED (the far right LED) indicates whether or not your scan is successful. The LED behaves
as follows:
Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour.

Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended.
Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red.
A barcode icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the onscreen message
states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, disable the Scan Indicator. (Refer to Scan
Indicator on page 4-90.
When the scan is successful, the barcode data is displayed on the screen until the scan button (or pistol
trigger) is released, but only if the Scan Result parameter is turned on. Refer to Scan Result on page 4-90.
You can also enable sounds and vibrations to indicate good and bad scans by enabling Good Scan Beep and
Bad Scan Beep and Good and Bad Scan Vibrates. Refer to Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep on
Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
Is the unit on?

Check that the barcode symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are using. Check any
other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the barcode.
Check the barcode to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different barcode to verify that the
problem is not with the barcode.
Check that the barcode is within the proper range.
Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in
the hand-held.
Is the laser beam scanning across the barcode?
Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging.
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners

Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
IMPORTANT If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be
enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after which
normal scanning begins. Refer to Dot Time (msec) on page C-4 in
Appendix C: Scanner Settings for details.
Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate
an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on
long-range and high visibility internal scanners.
Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until
a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers

An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single barcode or multiple barcodes (at one time). It can find a
barcode regardless of its orientation that is, even a barcode printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand-held
will be decoded successfully.
NOTE When scanning multiple barcodes, ensure that all of the desired barcodes are
within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all barcodes
are within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully
decoded barcodes are passed to the application program. The application pro-
gram then issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing barcodes.
When scanning a single barcode, ensure that only the desired barcode is
within the field of view of the scanner.
Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be
required to find the optimal distance from the types of barcodes being scanned. Although the imager includes
illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the barcodes, especially if the barcode is far from
the hand-held.
IMPORTANT Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illu-
mination is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such
as plastic coated barcodes, just as glare is an issue for photogra-
phers. When pointing at a shiny surface, either shift the barcode to
the side or top, or angle the barcode so that the glare reflects away
from the imager scanner.
Most imagers take several snap shots of the barcode in order to

decode it. It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold
the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance.
Turn the hand-held computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan
result is obtained.
When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed.
Centre the framing marker in the field either in the centre of the barcode you want to scan or in the
centre of the area in which multiple barcodes are to be scanned.
The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the barcode is taken.
Navigating in Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 and Applications

Graphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 for portable devices or desktop Windows
(2000, XP, etc.) utilize point and click navigation. On the Omnii, this is accomplished using a touchscreen and
stylus rather than a mouse.
Navigating Using a Touchscreen
NOTE If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may need
recalibration. Refer to Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 2-13.
A touchscreen is a standard feature on all Omnii hand-held computers. Each is shipped with a stylus a
pointing tool.
Use the stylus to tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders, launch applications and programs,
make selections, and so on. You can also use your finger rather than the stylus.
Tap and flick the stylus or your finger on the screen to scroll through the options on a screen.
Tap on the navigation bar to display additional icons.
Navigating Using the Keyboard

If you prefer to use the keyboard to move the cursor around the screens on your Omnii, refer to the tab le
following for a description of the navigation keys.
Operation Key or Key Combination

Switch between active [ALT] [TAB]
applications
Open task manager [ALT] [ESC]
Move the cursor Arrow keys
Operation Key or Key Combination

Open file, folder or icon [ENTER]
Exit & Save [ENTER]
Close/Exit & Do Not Save [ESC]
Navigate Dialog Boxes [TAB]
To move cursor up [SHIFT] [TAB]
To display the contents of the next tab in a

dialog box [CTRL] [TAB]
Select Radio Button/Press Button [SPACE]
Go to Start Menu [Windows]
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the Omnii does not support key chording (pressing two keys at
the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence.
The Today Screen

The Today screen provides quick access to a default list of applets such as phone, voicemail, and so on. This
screen is also equipped with a navigation bar along the top of the screen which provides access to hotkeys.
Hotkeys act as shortcuts to apps. Along the bottom of the screen, a softkey bar contains softkeys that help you
navigate in particular, the Start button which provides access to everything else youll need to work with
Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5.
Navigation bar
Start button Softkey bar
Softkeys
Use the stylus or your finger to scroll to and highlight the option you want to work with. The highlighted
option displays information specific to the applet. For example, highlighting the Calendar option lets you
know if there are any appointments.
Tap on any highlighted option to display the associated dialog box. Note that you can also double-tap on
any option to display the associated dialog box.
Depending on which option you tap on, the softkeys at the bottom of the screen change to help support
working with the particular option youve chosen.
Customizing the Today Screen

The items you see in the Today screen are Windows defaults. To customize the screen to suit your purposes:
Tap on the Start button. Tap on the Settings icon followed by the Home icon.
In the scrolling tab bar at the top of the screen, scroll to the Items tab.
The items you select will appear in the Today screen. Once youve chosen the items to appear on the Today
screen, you can also tailor the order in which you want the items to appear:
Highlight an item. Tap on the Move Up and Move Down buttons to order your selections.
When you choose items for the Today screen using this method, the appearance of the Today screen will
change to a list format.
The Today Screen Default Options

A list of options are available from the Today screen. Keep in mind that these can be altered using the method
described above in Customizing the Today Screen on page 2-22. You can also refer to Shell Settings on
page 4-78 for additional customization options.
Pictures
This option provides access to the Pictures & Videos applet. Refer to Pictures & Videos on page 3-17
for details.
Music
Tapping on the Music option displays the Windows Media applet. Refer to Windows Media on page 3-20
for details.
Phone
Scroll to and highlight the Phone option to learn if youve missed any calls.
Tap the stylus on the highlighted Phone option to display the phone console.
Refer to The Phone on page 3-4 for details about using the phone.
Voicemail
Highlighting Voicemail lets you know if you have any new voice messages. Tapping the stylus on this option
displays the phone console so that you can dial the phone number to access your voice messages.
If your service supports voicemail but it has not been set up:
Tap on Voicemail in the Today screen.
Type your voicemail number.
Time, Date and Alarms

Tap on Start>Alarms icon to display Clock & Alarms screen.
Setting the Alarm

You can set a maximum of three alarms.
In the Alarms tab, tap on the Time or Day in the Clock & Alarms screen. An Alarm Settings screen is
displayed.
To set the time, highlight the hours and then the minutes in the clock and use the arrow keys to increase
or decrease the numbers, or type the hours and minutes directly from the keyboard or soft keyboard.
Type a description in the Description field.
Tap on the day on which you want the alarm to go off Sunday through Saturday.
Next, choose the Sound - you can tap on the Play button to experiment with the sounds. You can also
choose No Sound.
In the drop-down menu below the Play button, you can choose how the alarm will behave, whether or not it
will repeat and so on.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
Setting the Time and Date

To set the time on the Omnii:
If it is not already displayed, tap on the Time tab at the top of the screen.
Choose the appropriate Time Zone, set the Date, and the current Time.
Text Messages
In the Today screen, highlighting Text lets you know if you have any new text messages. Tapping the stylus on
this option displays the Text Messages screen.
Menu softkey
To compose and send a text message on your Omnii:
Tap on the Menu softkey, and choose New from the menu.
In the To field, type the name of the person to whom you want to send a text message, or to insert a
number from your contacts list, tap on Menu>Add Recipient, and choose a name.
Tap your stylus in the message area, and type your message.
Tap on the Send softkey to deliver your message.
Send softkey
Once you send the message, your message is displayed in the Inbox and a conversation icon is displayed in
the softkey bar.
Conversation softkey
Highlighting the text message and tapping on the conversation softkey automatically connects to the senders
information so you can compose a reply.
E-mail Notification
If you have any e-mail, highlighting this option lets you know if you have any unread e-mail. To view e-mail:
Tap on the E-mail option in the Today screen, or tap on Start followed by the E-mail icon to launch your
e-mail.
NOTE Refer to Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS) on
page 3-9 and Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or
Windows 7) on page 3-11 for details about synchronizing your e-mail.
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments

This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on in the weeks, months and
years ahead.
NOTE You can synchronize the Calendar so that any meetings, appointments and so
on are displayed on your Omnii Today screen as well as on your PC. Refer to
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS) on page 3-9 and
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7) on
In the Today screen, tap on Calendar, or tap on Start>Calendar icon to display the calendar applet.
Calendar softkey
Menu softkey
The default calendar displays any scheduled appointments. To choose the format of your calendar:
Tap on the Calendar softkey this key scrolls through the calendar formats.
Menu softkey
Creating and Editing Appointments

In the Calendar screen, tap on the Menu softkey in the softkey bar, and then tap on New Appointment.
Figure 2-6 Appointment Detail Screen
In the Subject field, name the appointment.

Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details.
Adding Reminders
If you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment:
Tap on the Reminder field, and choose Remind me from the drop-down menu.
Tap the field below the Reminder field, and tap on the number in the field to display a drop-down menu
where you can define a numeric value of 1, 5, 10, 15, 30. Tap on minute(s) to display a drop-down menu
from which you can choose the time unit for your reminder minute(s), hour(s), day(s) or week(s).
Tap OK to finish. You are returned to the view you were in before adding the reminder.
Tap the appointment in the Calendar screen to display it in a summary screen. The reminder is indicated
by the small, bell icon.
If youve no further additions for the appointment, tap on OK. Otherwise, move to the Categories
section following.
Using Categories
Categories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your Omnii.
To assign an appointment to a category:
Tap on the Menu softkey, and choose Edit.
The Appointment tab is displayed.
Scroll down to the Categories field, and tap on it to display your options.
New category softkey
Tap in the checkbox next to the category to which you want to assign the appointment.
Tap OK. Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose.
NOTE You can create a new category by tapping on the New softkey at the bottom of
the screen.
Attendees
This option allows you to define required and optional attendees for your meeting. When you tap on this option,
your contacts are displayed where you can choose attendees.
Status
Tapping on Status lists your availability - Free, Tentative, Busy, or Out of Office.
Sensitivity
This option allows you to indicate the nature of the appointment Normal, Personal, Private, or Confidential.
Deleting Appointments
Tap and hold the stylus on the appointment you want to delete.
Tap on Delete Appointment in the pop-up menu.
Favorites
Tapping on the Favorites option in the Today screen connects you to internet favourites. If you tap and drag
your stylus on this option, you can choose Add/Remove to edit your list of favourites.
Using the Navigation Bar and Hotkeys

The navigation bar along the top of the screen provides access to icons or hotkeys that, when tapped, provide
shortcuts to associated apps.
Navigation bar
Tap anywhere in the navigation bar to display the hotkeys.
Hotkeys
Tap and drag the stylus to
the left to display additional
hotkeys.
Tap on a hotkey to display

the associated app.
Shift-State Indicator Icon

The navigation bar at the top of the screen can also display the shift-state indicator icon. This icon indicates
active modifier keys [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [SYM] and [BLUE/FN].
When a modifier key is pressed, it is displayed in the shift-state indicator icon. In the example above, the
[BLUE/FN] key was activated.
To distinguish a locked modifier key a key that has been locked on from a modifier key that is only active
until the next key is pressed, locked keys are encircled in a black frame in the shift-state indicator icon. Refer
to Activating Modifier Keys on page 2-9 for details.
The Softkey Bar

The Omnii is equipped with a softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. It displays softkeys that allow you to
access menus and commands. Note that the softkeys change to reflect the program with which you are
working. It also displays the soft keyboard icon.
Soft keyboard icon
Soft keyboard
Softkey Bar
Softkeys
Softkeys
Tapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey for example, in the sample screen
above, the Menu softkey displays the commands associated with Word Mobile. The View softkey allows you to
tailor how the Word document will be displayed.
The Soft Keyboard Icon

Tapping on the soft keyboard icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an alternative to the
Omnii keyboard.
The Start Button

The Start button provides access to a screen of applets available on your Omnii.
Tap on the Start button in the lower-left corner of the softkey bar to display your programs.
Managing Files and Folders

Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible with File
Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop
PC.
Tap on the Start button.

Use the stylus to scroll to the File Explorer icon.
Tap on the icon to display the File Explorer screen.

Tap to display additional
Tap to display sorting options storage/files
Files stored
here automa-
tically
Creating a New Folder

Tap Start>File Explorer.
Tap the Menu softkey, and in the pop-up menu, choose New Folder.
Use the Omnii keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a name to the folder.
Renaming a File
Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to rename. A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop- up
menu.
Tap Rename. The file name is highlighted. Type a new name.
Copying a File
Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to copy. A ring of dots is displayed followed by a
pop-up menu.
Tap on Copy in the pop-up menu.
Navigate to the location where you want to copy the file.
Press and hold the stylus in a blank area of the screen away from other icons until a pop-up menu
is displayed.
Tap Paste to copy the file to the new location.
Deleting a File
Press and hold the stylus on the file or folder you want to delete until a pop-up menu is displayed.
Tap Delete to remove the file.
Using Menus
In Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5, the menu is located in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
Softkey Bar
Menu softkey
To execute a command:
Tap on Menu to display the commands associated with it, and then tap on the command you want
to execute.
Pop-Up Menus
Pop-up menus are available in many screens and programs. They offer quick access to a group of useful
commands in addition to those available in the menu bar. To display a pop-up menu:
Gently press and hold the stylus on the screen. A ring of dots is displayed on the screen followed by a
pop-up menu.
Tap on the command you want to execute.

Programs Using Applications

Tap the Start button in the softkey bar to display the programs installed on your Omnii.
Figure 2-7 Program Icons
Opening an Application
Tap on a the Program icon to launch the associated program.
Minimizing an Application
Tap on the X button in the lower-right corner of an application screen to minimize the application.
NOTE Although it looks like a Close button, this button does not close the application
it only minimizes it.
Opening, Closing and Switching Applications

Tap on Start>Settings>System icon. Use your stylus to scroll to the Task Manager icon.
Tap on Task Manager to display the associated screen.
The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications). This applet provides a number of options to
manage your opened applications.
End Task: To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list, and tap on the End Task
softkey in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
End All Tasks: To shut down all applications, tap on the Menu softkey, and choose End All Tasks.
Switch To: To make an application listed in this screen active, highlight the application, and tap on
Menu>Switch To.
For additional information about the Task Manager, refer to Task Manager on page 4-97.
Settings
Tap Start followed by the Settings icon to display the setting options for your Omnii.
Figure 2-8 Settings Icons

Along with icons that provide information about your unit and allow you to adjust the appearance and behav-
iour of your Omnii, an additional group of icons is stored in three folders Personal, System and Connections.
Refer to Chapter 4: Settings for details about the options available to you.
Kiosk
Kiosk allows the administrator to tailor how the Omnii operates and the options the user can access. Note that
the look of the Today screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items that is best
accessed using a stylus.
IMPORTANT For details about this application, refer to Kiosk on page 4-76.
Data Transfer Between Omnii and a PC

Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC.
For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier, Microsoft ActiveSync connectivity software can be used
to connect your Omnii to a PC.
If the Windows Vista, Windows 7 or later, operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not required
to transfer data between your Omnii and your PC.
By using a Snap Module or Desktop Docking Station with your Omnii, you can connect to a PC with a
cable and:
View Omnii files from Windows Explorer.

Drag and drop files between Omnii and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives.
Back up Omnii files to the PC, restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, etc.
Uploading Data in a Docking Station

The Desktop Docking Stations allow your hand-held to upload transaction data to a server computer when a
radio link is not available. When Omnii is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the
navigation bar at the top of the screen.
Using Microsoft ActiveSync
NOTE If you use a serial port to connect devices like Omnii to your desktop computer,
the connection may not succeed because ActiveSync has trouble connecting at
non-default baud rates.
To work around this problem, set the ActiveSync baud rate on the desktop to
use the same baud rate as the device. You can set the baud rate by editing the
registry on the desktop host computer, as detailed in the steps outlined at the
following website:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324466
To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the setup wizard. For details, go to the
following download center, and type ActiveSync into the search box:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx
Using Windows Mobile Device Center

If you are running Windows Vista, Windows 7, or later, your data transfers do not require ActiveSync.
Instead, you will need to download Windows Mobile Device Center. For instructions, go to the following down-
load website and type the name into the search box:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx
To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held:
Tap on Start>Computer to display the drives. Omnii will be visible here.

Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.
General Maintenance
Caring for the Touchscreen
The touchscreen is covered with a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside.
The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and
scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conduc-
tive coating. The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
mustard, ketchup
sodium hydroxide
concentrated caustic solutions
benzyl alcohol
concentrated acids
If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (RV6105).
These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touch-
screen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.
Do not to expose the touchscreen to direct sunlight for prolonged periods of time. If this is unavoidable, use a
UV screen protector to extend the life of the screen.
Cleaning the Omnii
IMPORTANT Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild
detergent to wipe the unit clean.
To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only your finger or the

stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii.
Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The Omnii has a plastic case that is
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits, aircraft de-icing fluid,
and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
Exposure to aircraft de-icing fluids can degrade the plastics on the Omnii. If the Omnii is used near aircraft
de-icing environments, regular rinsing with water is recommended.
To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.
CHAPTER 3 PROGRAMS
PROGRAMS 3
Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
The Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
The Onscreen Phone Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Sending & Ending Phone Calls Using the Onscreen Phone Keypad . . . . . . .3-4
Sending & Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Making a Conference Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Programming Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Managing Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Text Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Changing Synchronization Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7) . . . . . . . 3-11
Sending an E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Working with the Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Communicate Tab - Adding Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Browsing Web Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Moving Photos to the Omnii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Opening a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Deleting a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Editing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

Creating a Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Using the Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Windows Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Messenger (Windows Live) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Windows Live. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Creating a Note Using the Soft Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Creating and Converting Handwritten Notes to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Renaming a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Recording Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Task Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
File Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Internet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Creating an Internet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Using Internet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Search Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Imager and Camera Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Office Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
OneNote Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Word Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Text Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Sharing Documents with your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
SharePoint Workspace Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
PartnerUp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Kiosk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Modem Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Remote Desktop Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Connecting to a Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Disconnecting Without Ending a Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
SIM Toolkit UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
WiFiConnect A.R.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Programs 3 - 3
Programs
Omnii programs are all available from the Start screen.
Tap on the Start button in the lower-left corner of the Today screen to display the Start screen.
Tapping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet.
IMPORTANT For details about the options contained under the Settings icon,
refer to Chapter 4: Settings.
Home
Tapping on the Home icon in the Start screen displays the Today screen.
IMPORTANT For details about the Today screen, refer to The Today Screen on
page 2-21.
The Phone
The Omnii can be equipped with optional phone capabilities. To access the phone pad on a unit that includes
the phone option:
Tap on Start>Phone icon.
The Onscreen Phone Keypad

The onscreen phone keypad provides phone services like those you may find on your cellular phone. You can
use the phone keypad provided with your Omnii to, for example, send and receive phone calls, make confer-
ence calls, view your call history, set up speed dial numbers, etc.
Sending & Ending Phone Calls Using the Onscreen Phone Keypad
To display the onscreen phone keypad:
Tap on Start>Phone icon.
NOTE You can also press the [Talk] key on the Omnii keyboard to display the phone
keypad providing it has been activated. The [Talk] key is labelled with a green
telephone receiver icon.
Phone settings
Directory assistance
Hide/show keypad Menu

Programs 3 - 5
To make a phone call:
Use the phone keypad to enter the phone number. Tap on [Talk] to connect the call.
When you tap on the [Talk] button to connect to a phone number, the [Talk] button toggles to become the [End]
button. When youve completed your call and want to disconnect:
Tap on [End] button on the onscreen phone keypad.
Sending & Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard

The 55-key and the 66-key Omnii keyboards come equipped with phone keys each has a [Talk] and an [End]
key on the physical keyboard.
[Talk] [End]
key key
Press the [Talk] key to answer a call or to display the onscreen phone keypad so you can initiate a call.
Press the [End] key to terminate a phone call.
Making a Conference Call

To set up a conference call between yourself and two or more other parties:
In the phone keypad, type the first phone number. Tap on [Talk].
While you are connected to the first number, tap on Menu>Hold.
Type the second number. Tap on [Talk].
Tap on Menu>Conference.
To add another party, tap on Menu>Hold, type the number, and then tap Menu>Conference.
Tap on [End] to disconnect all calls.
Programming Speed Dial

The phone keypad provides a Speed Dial button for quick access to frequently used numbers.
In the phone keypad, tap on the Speed Dial button to display the speed dial Phone dialog box.
Speed dial number
Call softkey
This dialog box lists the phone numbers and the speed dial key to which the phone number has
been assigned.
Tap on the Speed Dial Number (the number to the left of the phone number you want to dial), or
Tap on the Call softkey in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen; the number is dialled for you.
Using the Phone Keypad to Program a Speed Dial

There are a number of ways to add a speed dial number. You can create a speed dial number using the
Contacts list or by using the Speed Dial button on the phone keypad.
Adding a New Phone Number

In the phone keypad, tap on the Speed Dial button.
In the speed dial Phone dialog box, tap on Menu>New.
In the list, choose a contact for a speed dial.
Type a contact name in the field where the cursor is displayed, or tap on a name in the list.
Programs 3 - 7
A sequential speed dial key is automatically assigned in the Location field. You can tap on the arrows to the
right of the Location field to change the auto assignment.
Using the Contact List to Program a Speed Dial

Tap on Start followed by the Contacts icon.
Tap on the Contact to which you want to assign a speed dial number.
In the Summary screen, tap on Menu>Add to Speed Dial.

Managing Phone Settings

You can adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone, choose phone services such as barring calls,
and you can also determine network selections.
IMPORTANT For details, refer to The Phone Managing Settings on page 4-51.
Text Messages
Tapping on the Text option in the Today screen displays this screen.
This option allows you to compose, send and receive text messages using your Omnii.
IMPORTANT For details about using the Text Messages feature, refer to Text
Messages on page 2-24.
Programs 3 - 9
E-mail
NOTE If your e-mail is already synchronized, go to Sending an E-mail on page 3-12.
The E-mail program is used to send and receive e-mail on your Omnii. It also provides access to
text messages.
To send and receive e-mail, youll need to synchronize your PC or connect to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3)
or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server.
For each of these methods, you need to set up an e-mail account with one exception Outlook e-mail
accounts are set up by default.
Folders
If you use an Outlook e-mail account, messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchronized
with your Omnii. You can use ActiveSync on your PC to synchronize additional folders. The folders and
messages you move are mirrored on the server.
For POP3 accounts, if you move e-mail messages to a folder you create, the link between the messages on
the Omnii and the copies on the mail server are broken. When you next connect, the mail server will recognize
that the messages are missing from the Omnii Inbox folder and delete them from the server, preventing dupli-
cation of messages. Keep in mind however that you will not have further access to messages that you moved
to folders from anywhere except with the Omnii.
For IMAP4 accounts, the folders you create and the messages you move are reflected on the server, making
messages available any time whether you connect to your mail server from your Omnii or your PC.
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS)
IMPORTANT For PCs running Windows Vista or Windows 7, follow the guidelines
under Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or
Windows 7) on page 3-11.
By synchronizing the Omnii E-mail program with Outlook on your PC, your e-mail is available on both the
Omnii and on your PC.
NOTE Synchronizing e-mail does not require that the Omnii have an independent con-
nection to the Internet.
In ActiveSync on your PC, tap on Tools>Options in the tool bar at the top of the screen.
Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E-mail. Tap on OK.
Once you check E-mail for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are synchronized as part of the general
synchronization process. The next time you synchronize with ActiveSync, the e-mail in Outlook on your PC will
be transferred to the Messaging program on your Omnii.
Changing Synchronization Settings

In ActiveSync on your PC, double-tap the E-mail item in the Sync Options tab.
Programs 3 - 11
Tap on the Select Folder button.
Add a check mark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchronize with your Omnii, and tap
on OK.
The E-mail Synchronization screen is displayed again.
If you want to accept file attachments, add a check mark next to Include file attachments. To limit the size,
tap on Only if smaller than, and specify a size in the KB box.
Tap on OK.
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7)

PCs running Windows Vista or Windows 7 use Windows Mobile Device Center in place of ActiveSync.
In the Windows Mobile Device Center, tap on Set up your device.

Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E-mail. Tap on Next.
NOTE If an Exchange Server is detected, a screen is displayed where you can enter
the Server address, your user name and so on, and sync the Omnii with the
Exchange Server directly over a cellular or wireless network when you are not
connected to your PC. This is an optional step that you can skip.
Tap on Skip and then tap on Setup.
When E-mail is checked for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are synchronized as part of the general
synchronization process. The next time you synchronize with Windows Mobile Center, the e-mail in Outlook on
your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on your Omnii.
Sending an E-mail
E-mail messages are stored in the Outbox folder and are sent to recipients the next time you sync or connect
to your e-mail server to send and receive mail.
Tap on Start>E-mail.
Choose the e-mail account you want to use.
Tap on Menu>New.
In the To, Cc, or Bcc fields, enter an e-mail address.
Keep in mind that you can also use your Contacts to choose an e-mail recipient provided an e-mail address is
associated with the contact.
Tap Menu>Add Recipient, and then choose a contact from the list.
If you're sending an email to multiple people, use a semicolon (;) between addresses.
Contacts
Contacts are available with your e-mail, text messages, voice messages and your phone.
Tap on Start>Contacts to display your contacts.

Programs 3 - 13
Working with the Contacts List

The Contacts screen allows you to work with existing entries, search for a particular contact and create
new entries.
Contact Menu Commands

A Menu softkey at the bottom of the screen provides additional commands that allow you to work with the
contacts in this list.
Menu
Searching for a Contact
Type a contact
name here
Tap on an alpha
group to narrow
the search
To search for a particular entry:
Tap on the Enter a name ... field, and type the name you are searching for in the Contacts list.
To narrow your search to names beginning with a particular letter, tap on the appropriate alpha
character grouping.
Communicate Tab - Adding Contacts

Adding a New Contact
The New softkey located to the right of the Start softkey allows you to add additional entries to your contacts
list.
Tap on the New softkey.
New
Choose the contact type to which you want to add an entry.

Tap on the Select button to display the Communicate screen. Tap on each of the options you want to com-
plete for the new contact you are creating. Each item you tap on in this screen produces an associated
pop-up screen in which you can enter the appropriate information. For example, in the sample screen fol-
lowing, tapping on Add a name displays an associated screen for you to complete.
When youve completed the information for the contact entry, tap on OK. The new contact is displayed in
the Contacts list.
Programs 3 - 15
Info Tab
This tab allows you define a ring tone for a particular contact. You can also add additional addresses related to
your contact (work and home), and information about your contact such as a job title, office location and
fax number.
Notes Tab
This screen allows you to enter useful information about your contact.
Internet Explorer
You can connect to Internet Explorer in two ways: by connecting the Omnii directly to the Internet or by
connecting through your PC (see ActiveSync on page 3-27).
Browsing Web Sites

There is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC and that found on your
Omnii, sometimes referred to as Pocket Internet Explorer. You can enter URLs, set a home page, turn images
on and off, e-mail links to friends, and so on.
To go to a web site:
Connect your Omnii to the Internet. (If youre not certain how to do this, refer to Connections Connecting
to the Internet on page 4-23).
Tap on Start>Internet Explorer to open Internet Explorer.
Tap on the address bar the field near the top of the screen where URLs are entered to highlight the
current URL.
Type a new URL in the address bar.
Tapping on the softkeys in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen displays Internet Explorer commands like
those you find on your PC.
Calendar
This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on in the weeks, months and
years ahead.
IMPORTANT Refer to Calendar of Upcoming Appointments on page 2-26 for

details about this feature.
Alarms
Refer to Time, Date and Alarms on page 2-23 for details about this applet.
Programs 3 - 17
Pictures & Videos

The Pictures & Videos applet allows you to snap photographs and record video footage. It is also a photo and
video viewing program.
IMPORTANT The Pictures & Videos program can only display .bmp or .jpg for-
mats. Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC
before they are transferred to the Omnii.
Using the Camera

Tap on Start>Pictures & Videos.
Keep in mind that if there are no pictures stored on your Omnii as yet, youll only see the Camera icon in
this screen.
Tap on the Camera icon to activate the camera.
The screen will display the image your camera is pointed at. (The camera is built into the back of the Omnii.)
Photo Film Icon indicates

the camera is active.
Tapping on this softkey

displays thumbnails of
photos stored on the Omnii.
Frame the image in the Omnii screen. Press [ENTER] to snap the photograph.
Photo Menu
When the camera is activated, tapping on Menu displays a set of commands to help you modify how your
camera operates, the quality of the photos it takes, and so on. You can also use this menu to activate the video
recorder rather than the still camera.
NOTE Video is a toggle command. When the Still camera is activated, Video is
available in this menu. When the video recorder is activated, Still (camera) is
available in this menu.
Moving Photos to the Omnii

Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync.
Locate the pictures on your PC, and drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device (Omnii). The Omnii
can be found under Computer (My Computer on PCs running Windows XP).
Opening a Photo
To open a photo, tap on Start>Pictures & Videos. Youll see a thumbnail of your photos.
Tap on a thumbnail to open the photo.
NOTE If youve stored your photos on a storage card, youll need to tap on the storage
card icon to display your photos.
Deleting a Photo
Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop-up menu. Tap
on Delete.
Confirm your choice when prompted.
Programs 3 - 19
Editing a Photo
Tap on a thumbnail photo to open it.
Tap on Menu>Edit.
The Rotate command is now displayed in the softkey bar. Additional editing tools are listed in the Menu.
Creating a Slide Show

To view a slide show:
Tap on the Menu>Play Slide Show.
The slide show begins in slide show mode, photos are displayed for about five seconds, one after the other.
To display the slide show tool bar, tap anywhere on the photo.
Pause Previous
Play Next
Flip View Close
Using the Video Recorder

Tap on the Camera icon.
In the bottom-right corner of the camera screen, tap on Menu>Video.

Press [ENTER] to begin recording.
Video Recorder Icon

Indicates that video
is active.
To end the video, press [ENTER] again, or tap on the Stop softkey.
NOTE When the Video recorder is activated, a Menu is available to tailor the operation
of the recorder, the quality of the recording, and so on.
Windows Media
Windows Media allows you to play music and videos on your Omnii. You can use Windows Media to play
digital audio and video files that are stored on your Omnii or on the web.
To work with this applet, tap on Start>Windows Media.
For details about using this applet, refer to:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsphone/en-us/howto/wp6/music/windows-media-player-mobile.aspx
Messenger (Windows Live)

Windows Live Messenger is an instant messaging service. Refer to the Microsoft web site for details.
Programs 3 - 21
Windows Live
Windows Live is a free online service that provides operators with a free mobile phone back-up solution
by wirelessly synchronizing contacts, calendar appointments, and so on with a password-protected
online portal.
When you tap on Windows Live and accept the license agreement, a Setup screen is displayed. Follow the
setup steps to set up your Windows Live ID so that you can begin using this service.
Notes
The Notes application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas quickly. You can enter text
using the soft keyboard, the Omnii keyboard, or you can create a handwritten note on the screen by using the
transcriber. You can also record a message.
Notes can also be shared through e-mail and synchronization with your PC.
Tap on Start>Notes to launch this application.
New
Tap on the New softkey to display a blank note.
Creating a Note Using the Soft Keyboard

The soft keyboard icon is available by default. It is a replica of a standard keyboard. Use your stylus to type
letters, numbers, symbols and so on.
When youve completed your note, tap on OK.
Your note is automatically saved. The file name is the first line of the note if you used the keyboard otherwise,
its named Note1, Note2 and so on.
Creating and Converting Handwritten Notes to Text

To create a handwritten note using the transcriber:
Tap and hold the stylus on the soft keyboard icon to display the pop-up menu.
Choose Transcriber from the menu.
When you choose Transcriber, you can write notes in your own handwriting. Omnii converts the notes into
typed text for you.
A Transcriber Intro screen is displayed to provide information to help you work with the Transcriber.
When you choose Transcriber, the soft keyboard icon changes to an icon of a hand poised to write a note.
Programs 3 - 23
At the top of the Transcriber Intro screen, tap on OK.

In the blank Note screen, use your stylus to write a note as clearly as possible.
The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text.
Renaming a Note
Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the Notes screen that you want to rename. In the pop-up
menu, choose Rename/Move.
In the Name field, type the new name.
NOTE Remember that if you want to use the soft keyboard to type a new name, youll
need to tap and hold the stylus on the Transcriber icon, and choose Keyboard
from the popup menu.
You can also move the note to a new Folder and/or a new Location.
When youve made the changes you need, tap on OK.
Recording Notes
It is sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that youve captured an idea
before it drifts away. To make an audio recording:
Tap on the New softkey to open a fresh note.

Tap on Menu>View Recording Toolbar.
Volume
Skip to end
Skip to start
Record
Stop
Play
Tap on the Record button a beep alerts you that your device is now ready to record.
Begin speaking into the microphone on the Omnii. Make certain that you move the Omnii to within a few
feet of the source of the sound you want to record.
Tap on the Stop button when youve completed your recording.
Tap on OK to save the recorded note.
A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within the note.
To play the recorded note, tap on the speaker icon.

Tap on Menu, and choose View Recording Toolbar again to turn off the feature.
Task Notification
Tasks lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities, upcoming projects, and so on. If youve
assigned any tasks, this option lets you know how many active tasks you have.
NOTE You can synchronize the Task Notification option so that any tasks are displayed
on your Omnii as well as your PC. Refer to Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook
(PC with Windows XP OS) on page 3-9 and Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook
(PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7) on page 3-11. Each section outlines how
to synchronize options other than e-mail.
Tap on Start>Tasks to display the Tasks screen.

Programs 3 - 25
Creating a Task
Tap in the field labelled Tap here to add a new task.
Type your task description.
Press [ENTER] to add the task to your list.
Edit
Editing a Task
Tap on a task in the task you want to edit. Tap on the Edit softkey in the softkey bar to display a detailed
task screen where you can define task characteristics.
Figure 3-1 Task Details Screen

Each of the nine items in this screen, when tapped, displays a drop-down menu where you can choose from a
list of options.
Once youve completed all the appropriate fields, tap on OK to save your changes.
NOTE You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the task
you are defining.
Deleting a Task
Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop-up menu is displayed.
Tap on Delete Task.
Marking a Task as Completed

In the Tasks list, tap the checkbox next to the items that are completed.
Sorting Tasks
Tap on the Menu softkey, and tap on Sort By.
You can choose from Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date or Due Date. The tasks are arranged in the list
according to the criterion you chose.
Limiting the Tasks Displayed in the Task Screen

Tap on Menu in the softkey bar, and tap on Filter.
You can choose All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories, Active Tasks or Completed Tasks. The tasks
are displayed on the screen according to the preference you chose.
File Explorer
Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible through
File Explorer. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any
desktop PC.
IMPORTANT Refer to Managing Files and Folders on page 2-31 for details
about this feature.
Programs 3 - 27
ActiveSync
ActiveSync is Microsoft PC connectivity software that can be used to connect the Omnii to PCs running this
software. You can synchronize the Omnii with your PC using this utility.
By connecting the Omnii to a PC through your desktop docking station and running ActiveSync or Mobile
Device Center on your PC, you can view Omnii files, drag and drop files between the Omnii and the PC,
connect to the Internet, and so on.
Synchronization
IMPORTANT For information about using ActiveSync and Mobile Device Center on
your PC, refer to Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with
Windows XP OS) on page 3-9 and Synchronizing E-mail with
Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7) on page 3-11.
To download either ActiveSync or Mobile Device Center, visit the following Microsoft internet site:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows-
phone/en-gb/howto/wp6/sync/prepare-to-sync-windows-phone-6-5-with-my-computer.aspx
Internet Sharing
This option allows you to use your Omnii to connect your PC to the Internet. Before you can use Internet
Sharing, you must make certain that you have established a data connection on your Omnii.
Creating an Internet Connection

Follow the steps in this section only if you have not already setup an Internet connection.
Youll need the following information before you begin:

From your cellular service provider: data connectivity information, access point name and PAP/CHAP
security settings.
From your Internet service provider (ISP) or wireless service provider: access point name and password and
any additional security information.
For a GPRS, 1xRTT or dialup connection:
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections. Tap on the Connections icon.

Under My Work Network , tap Add a new modem connection.
Type a name for the connection, and choose Cellular Line (GPRS), or for 1xRTT connections, choose
Cellular Line. Tap on Next.
Type the phone number or access point name provided by your service provider, and tap Next.
Type the credentials supplied by your service provider, and tap Finish.
Using Internet Sharing
NOTE Make certain that your data connection is running and that you can access the Inter-
net from the Omnii. If you are using a USB cable to connect to your PC, you will need
to disable the ActiveSync USB connection.
On your PC, open the ActiveSync window, and tap on File>Connection Settings. If you are using
Windows Mobile Device Center, tap on Mobile Device Settings>Connection Settings.
Disable Allow USB connection by tapping in the checkbox to the left of this option.
Connect the Omnii to your PC using Bluetooth or a USB cable.
On your Omnii, tap Start>Internet Sharing.
Choose the PC Connection type USB or Bluetooth.
Choose the network connection that the Omnii should use to connect to the Internet.
Tap Connect. It takes approximately 30 seconds to establish a connection. (If you are prompted to turn on
Bluetooth, tap Yes.)
For PC Running Windows XP or Earlier

If you are using a Bluetooth connection, execute the following steps on your PC:
Tap Start>Control Panel>Network Connections.

Right-click on Bluetooth Network Connections, and click on Bluetooth Network Devices.
If the Omnii is listed as a Network Access Point, choose Connect. If it is not listed, choose Create a new
connection and use the New Connection Wizard to add the Omnii to the list.
For PC Running Windows Vista or Windows 7

If you are using a Bluetooth connection, execute the following steps on your PC:
Tap Start>Control Panel>Network & Sharing Center.

Double-tap on Set up a new connection or network.
In the Choose a connection option screen, double-click on Connect to a Bluetooth personal area
network (PAN).
A Devices and Printers screen is displayed.

Programs 3 - 29
NOTE Make certain that Bluetooth is enabled on your Omnii and that it is discoverable
on your Omnii, tap on Start>Settings>Connections. Tap on the Bluetooth
icon. Scroll to the Mode tab. If they are not already enabled, tap in the checkbox
(add an x) next to Turn on Bluetooth and Discoverable.
In the Devices and Printers screen, tap on the Add a device button.
Your Omnii is displayed in the Add a device screen.
Double-tap on your Omnii icon.
You are asked to choose a pairing option Create a pairing code for me, or Enter the devices pairing code.
If a pairing code has been assigned to your Omnii, choose Enter the devices pairing code, and type the
Omnii passcode on your PC and on your Omnii.
If a pairing code has not been assigned to your Omnii, choose Create a pairing code for me, and type the
Omnii passcode on your PC and on your Omnii.
A message will appear on your Omnii indicating that you have successfully paired your Omnii with your PC.
Your Omnii will appear in Control Panel>Devices and Printers.
Task Manager
The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet provides a number of
options to manage these.
IMPORTANT For details about using the Task Manager, refer to Task Manager
on page 4-97.
Search Phone
This feature allows you to conduct a search through the data stored on your phone.
Tap on Start>Search Phone icon.

Tap in the Search For field, and type the information or a fragment of the information for which you
are searching.
In the Type: drop-down menu, choose the location in which you want to conduct the search.
Tap on the Search softkey key.
The results of your search are displayed in the Search screen.

Programs 3 - 31
Imager and Camera Demo

An Imager And Camera demo applet is provided to illustrate how the imager and camera work.
To launch the demo applet:
Tap on the Imager and Camera icon.
IMPORTANT Refer to Appendix B: Imagers Applet for details about the

imager applet.
Office Mobile
This icon contains the following abridged Microsoft programs: Excel Mobile, OneNote Mobile, PowerPoint
Mobile, SharePoint Workspace Mobile and Word Mobile.
Tap on Start>Office Mobile.

Excel Mobile
Excel Mobile is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel, an electronic spreadsheet program. If youre familiar
the Excel application on your PC, youll be able to navigate Excel Mobile.
In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values like statistics, percentages, using
formulas that perform calculations, and so on, this program can also include graphics such as pie charts.
Excel Mobile allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto your Omnii and update them while youre
away from your desk.
Tap on Start>Office Mobile>Excel Mobile.

If a list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet, youll need to create a new workbook. To create
a workbook:
In Excel Mobile, tap the Menu>File>New.
OneNote Mobile
You can use OneNote Mobile to take notes wherever you are and then synchronize your notes with a notebook
section in the OneNote version on your PC. For example, you can:
Snap pictures of business cards on your Omnii and then bring them into OneNote on your PC.
Create short text notes and voice recordings on your Omnii to remind you about important meetings, ideas,
etc. and synchronize them with your notes.
Prepare information in OneNote on your PC and then transfer it to your Omnii where it will be available to
you wherever you and your Omnii go.
IMPORTANT Remember that you must have Microsoft Office OneNote 2010 and
the latest version of ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center
installed on your PC before you can set up a partnership between
your Omnii and your PC.
Setting Up a Partnership
Start Office OneNote and ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Center on your PC.
Connect the Omnii to your PC; you can use a USB cable or a Bluetooth connection.
Programs 3 - 33
When a connection is established between the Omnii and your PC, ActiveSync displays a New
Partnership screen.
Choose Standard partnership, and tap on Next.

To share information between OneNote Mobile and Office OneNote 2010 on your PC, tap Synchronize
with this desktop computer, and then tap on Next.
Tap on Finish to begin the partnership between the Omnii and the PC. Now youll be able to pass notes
back and forth between your PC and your Omnii.
Creating A Note
Tap on Start>OfficeMobile>OneNote Mobile icon. Tap on New in the softkey bar to display a blank note.
Tap on New to create a note page. Begin typing.
When you complete your note, tap on Done.
NOTE Remember that you can tap on the Menu softkey to Undo typing, add Formats
(Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough), and include Lists (Numbered, Bulleted,
Clear).
Using the OneNote Menu

Tapping on Menu displays a list of options to help you work with the OneNote Mobile applet.
Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy and Paste: These commands operate in the same way as they do in any
Windows Office application.
Format: Tapping on this command lists the formatting options you can apply to your note: Bold, Italic,
Underline, Strikethrough and Clear All.
Take Picture: When you tap on this option, the Omnii switches to camera mode so that you can snap a
picture to include in your note.
Press [ENTER] to snap a photo that is automatically inserted into your note.
Programs 3 - 35
Insert Picture: Tapping on this command automatically displays your My Pictures folder where you can
tap on an existing picture to insert it into your note.
Insert Recording: When you tap on this command, a recording panel is displayed.
Cancel
Save
Play
Stop
Record
Tap on the Record button to record your message.

Tap on Stop when youve completed your message.
Tap on Play to listen to your voice message.
To discard your message, tap on X the Cancel button.
To save your message, tap on OK. An audio icon is displayed in your note. You can tap on it to listen to
your message.
Synchronizing Omnii One Note With PC OneNote

Connect the Omnii to your PC using either a USB cable or Bluetooth.
When the connection is complete, take one of the following steps:
In Microsoft ActiveSync on your PC, choose Sync.

or
On your Omnii, tap on Start>ActiveSync, and then tap on Sync.
During synchronization, the notes you created on your Omnii are copied to a new Office OneNote 2010 note-
book called OneNote Mobile on your PC. When synchronization is done, you can drag the transferred notes
into any other sections and other notebooks on your PC.
Word Mobile
If youve used Microsoft Word on your PC, Word Mobile will be familiar to you. Keep in mind however that
Word Mobile is designed for a small screen and limited memory.
NOTE Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key formatting
features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on your Omnii.
Tap on Start>Office Mobile>Word Mobile.
NOTE If youve already created a Word document, it will be listed in a Word Mobile win-
dow. To launch a new Word document, youll need to tap on the New softkey.
Text Input Modes

In addition to the soft keyboard, you can enter text using the Omnii keyboard, soft keyboard or the transcriber.
IMPORTANT Refer to Notes on page 3-21 for details about the transcriber and
soft keyboard text input methods.
Sharing Documents with your PC

Documents created on a PC are recognized by your Omnii. However, some formatting is lost when a Word
document is converted to a Word Mobile document. This loss also occurs when you open a .doc file and
change it on the Omnii.
IMPORTANT To avoid problems, work on copies of .doc files. In addition, keep in

mind that you can use the Terminal Services Client program to log
onto a desktop PC that is also running Terminal Services, and then
you can use any program on your PC, including Microsoft Word
(rather than Word Mobile).
Refer to Remote Desktop Mobile on page 3-38.
PowerPoint Mobile
PowerPoint Mobile works just like the desktop version that may be installed on your PC. To launch this
program on your Omnii:
Tap on Start>Office Mobile>PowerPoint Mobile.

Programs 3 - 37
SharePoint Workspace Mobile

SharePoint Workspace Mobile allows you to open, edit, and save documents that are on a SharePoint site (a
web site that lets you and others share and collaborate on documents, projects, schedules, and so on).
Tap on Start>Office Mobile>SharePoint Mobile.

Tap on the Address softkey to highlight the web address field. Type the SharePoint address you want to
access.
Tap on Go to access documents in the SharePoint site you specified.
NOTE To access a SharePoint site using SharePoint Workspace Mobile from inside
your organization, you need to set up a Wi-Fi connection that lets you access a
SharePoint site on your company's network.
PartnerUp
This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associated
web site.
The operator can then install the application. If a license is required, it can be obtained by sending an e-mail to
the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Rep from the Zebra contact web page.
http://www.zebra.com/US-EN/Pages/Contact_Us/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_about_contact_psion-offices
Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Zebra.
Kiosk
the look of the Today screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items that is best
accessed using a stylus.
IMPORTANT For details about this application, refer to Kiosk on page 4-76.
Modem Link
Modem link allows you to use the GPRS connectivity on your phone to connect your laptop or PC to
the Internet.
Remote Desktop Mobile

This program allows you to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and run the desktop programs from the server
on your Omnii.
Connecting to a Terminal Server

Tap on Start>Remote Desktop Mobile
In the Remote Desktop screen, choose a Computer from the drop-down menu.
Type your User name, Password, and Domain (if required). Tap on Connect.
Programs 3 - 39
Disconnecting Without Ending a Session
IMPORTANT These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Terminal
Services screen used to access the PCs commands. Do NOT use
the Start menu on your Omnii.
In the Remote Desktop Connection window, tap on Start>Shutdown.

Tap on Disconnect>OK.
Ending a Session
In the Terminal Services Client screen, tap on Start>Shutdown.
Tap on Log Off>OK.
SIM Toolkit UI
SIM Toolkit UI is an ETSI/SMG standard for Value Added Services and e-commerce using GSM phones.
The Omnii operator can, for example, check bank accounts and pay bills using a SIM Toolkit-enabled phone
with an appropriate SIM Toolkit-specific SIM card which will provide much of the information required to
conclude a transaction over GSM.
If this service is available in your organization, the system administrator can provide the setup information for
your service.
WiFiConnect A.R.C.
Tap on the Start button to access the WiFiConnect A.R.C. icon.
The WiFiConnect A.R.C. utility provides a quick method to configure a device for use on a private network,
primarily for use with Active Remote Configuration (A.R.C.).
WiFiConnect A.R.C. configures the default WiFi interface. The WEP key is set to PsionPsion123. The SSID is
set to Psion. The default interface becomes the active interface. Keep in mind that you must configure the
access point and the hand-held(s) to use the same settings.
Refer to the Active Remote Configuration (A.R.C.) Administrators Guide, PN 8000252, for details about
updating devices on your network. This manual is available at:
www.ingenuityworking.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/1189.a-r-c-active-remote-configuration.aspx
CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS
SETTINGS 4
Overview of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

Zebra Software Advantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Microsoft Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Clocks & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Appearance Tab Changing the Theme (Background). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Beaming a Theme to Another Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Items Tab Customizing the Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Battery Details Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Battery Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Sound & Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sounds Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Notifications Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Connections Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
The Devices Tab - Scanning for Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Paired Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Connections Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Modem Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Advanced Modem Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Domain Enroll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Network Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
VPN Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Managing an Existing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Proxy Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Selecting a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Wi-Fi Config - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Wi-Fi Config: Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Country Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Wireless Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Personal Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
App Launch Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Program Buttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Up/Down Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
OneShots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Lock Sequence Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
The Phone Managing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Phone: Sounds Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Phone: Security Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Phone: Services Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
Phone: Network Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
Phone: Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Phone: Bands Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Phone: Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
Phone: Hearing Aid Mode Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
System Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Backlight Screen and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Battery Power Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
External Power Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
Backlight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
Choosing a Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
Settings 4 - 3
Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Customer Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Dr. Debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Motion Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Error Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
GPS (Global Positioning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Imagers Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Trigger Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Managed Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
PartnerUp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Quick Defrost (Heater Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Kiosk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Kiosk Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Import and Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Activating a Change User Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Scanner Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Translations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Screen Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Creating a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Creating a Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Advanced Interface and Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Settings 4 - 5
Overview of Software
Zebra Software Advantage
Zebra Software Advantage is a collection of applications and features designed to support system administra-
tors and end users. These tools enable enterprises to customize the product to meet their needs and to maxi-
mize productivity.
AGPS
Zebra Camera
App Launch Keys
Kiosk
Battery Health
TweakIt
Bluetooth Manager
Scanner
Compass
Dr. Debug
Total Recall
PartnerUp
Manage Triggers
WiFiConnect A.R.C.
Wi-Fi Config
Microsoft Software
Windows Embedded Hand-Held (WEH) 6.5 is a 32-bit, real-time Operating System. The OS is compatible with
line of business applications written for Windows Mobile 6.x that protects previous investments in the Windows
Mobile platform.
Some other major components of WEH 6.5 are:
Office Mobile 2010 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote SharePoint)

Internet Explorer 8
Remote Desktop protocol
Settings
The applets contained under the Settings icon in the Start screen allow you to tailor how your Omnii behaves,
the appearance of the Today screen, and so on. The Settings applications are further divided into Personal,
System, and Connection options.
Clocks & Alarms

Refer to Time, Date and Alarms on page 2-23 for details about this applet.
Lock
This option allows you to assign a password to protect access to your phone service.
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Lock icon.
It is critical that you store your password in a safe place. If you forget it, a clean start must be performed by
certified Zebra personnel. A clean start returns the Omnii to factory settings. Only the data stored in a CF or SD
memory card are preserved.
Tap in the checkbox next to Prompt if phone unused for to turn on password protection for your
phone service.
Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are prompted to enter your password.
Settings 4 - 7
In the Password type drop-down menu, choose the type of password you prefer to assign. Simple PIN
allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric characters. Strong alphanumeric requires a minimum of 7
characters and must contain at least three of the following: uppercase and lowercase alpha characters,
numbers and punctuation.
Type your password in the Password field.
Retype your password in the Confirm field.
Tap on OK. A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save your password settings. Tap on YES to
save your password assignment.
Home
The Home applet is used to customize your Today screen.
Tap on Start>Home icon to display this applet.
Appearance Tab Changing the Theme (Background)

The Appearance tab allows you to change the background appearance of the Today screen.
Tap on the theme or background you want to use. Tap on OK to assign the background youve chosen to
your Omnii.
NOTE You can also use a personal picture as your background. Tap on the checkbox to the
left of Use this picture as the background, and tap on the Browse button to locate
your picture.
Beaming a Theme to Another Device

You can also beam your selection to another device. To scan for visible devices and beam a theme:
Choose a theme or background, and tap on the Beam button.

The Omnii scans for visible devices within range of the hand-held and lists them in the Beam screen.
Tap on the device to which you want to send the theme.
A File Receive Confirmation dialog box appears on the device to which you are beaming the theme. If the
recipient taps on OK, the file is downloaded onto their device. Note that the recipient can also tap on Browse to
store the theme file in a different location.
Once the recipient clicks on OK to accept the file, the device you chose is marked as Done.
Items Tab Customizing the Today Screen

Settings 4 - 9
The items you see in the Today screen are Windows Default items. The Items tab allows you to customize the
screen to suit your purposes.
NOTE Refer to Customizing the Today Screen on page 2-22 for details about this screen.
Power
The Power applet provides information about the battery installed in your Omnii, and it allows you to define the
behaviour of your Omnii to minimize power consumption.
Tap on Start>Settings>Power icon.
Battery Power
This tab monitors and displays the current battery capacity of the battery installed in the Omnii.
Advanced Tab
This tab allows you to tailor how long the Omnii can remain idle before the screen is turned off while running on
battery power and also on external power.
NOTE The options in the screen behave like Suspend mode. If the screen turns off, the unit
is in suspend mode tapping on the touchscreen or pressing a key opens the screen
in which you were working before it was turned off.
To determine behaviour when the unit is running On battery power, tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn
off screen if device is not used for.
Tap in the drop-down menu next to this option, and choose the number of minutes the unit can remain idle
before the screen is turned off.
To determine behaviour when the unit is running On external power, tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn
off screen if device is not used for, and choose a value in the associated drop-down menu.
Battery Details Tab

In the scrolling tab bar, tap on the Battery Details tab.
This tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in the Omnii. This is a
view-only screen.
Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect
data until a fully charged battery can be installed in the Omnii. When the battery capacity is depleted up to the
Estimated Battery Backup Time reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold tab, the Omnii shuts off automati-
cally and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the Omnii. Once the unit shuts down, it cannot
be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle.
Settings 4 - 11
Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup pur-
poses. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 100 hours.
Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes; this
increases the Omnii operating time the amount of time the Omnii will operate before shutting down but
reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours.
Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the Omnii while the depleted battery is swapped for a
fully charged one.
NOTE Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitor will preserve the data stored on the
Omnii for approximately 4 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged battery
before this time elapses.
Battery Health
The Battery Health tab provides an estimate of battery health based on a number of different measurements,
beyond battery capacity.
IMPORTANT The Battery Health Meter is an estimate and should not be depended on to
provide a 100% account of battery condition.
In the scrolling tab bar, tap on the Battery Health tab.
Current Battery Health Meter

The Current Battery Health Meter default values are shown here as ***** (Excellent), *** (Used), and * (Battery
should be replaced).
To display the Battery Health Meter:

Tap on the navigation bar, scroll to and click on the battery hotkey.
Navigation bar
Battery hotkey
The image above shows the default Excellent status screen.
Enable Battery Health Service

This option allows you to enable or disable the battery health service.
Wakeup Device on Battery Insert

When this option is enabled, whenever the battery is replaced, the Omnii is powered up from a suspend state
and the current health of the battery is displayed.
Show Popup UI on Device-Resume

The drop-down menu attached to Show Popup UI on Device-Resume allows you to determine when the
battery status pop-up user interface (UI) will appear based on the battery health.
Edit Changing Ratings Text

You can customize the ratings text with the Edit button. By enclosing your text within the html tag used for Bold
<b> (or removing the tag to unbold the text), you can change the text that will appear in the pop-up battery
status screen. For example, the default text Excellent might be changed to: Battery is excellent, and will last
one day shift.
Sound & Notifications

The Sounds & Notifications icon allows you to specify when your Omnii will emit sounds.
Sounds Tab
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Sounds & Notifications icon to display this dialog box.
Settings 4 - 13
Tap on the checkboxes and radio buttons to enable the event(s) that will cause your unit to emit a sound.
Notifications Tab
Tap here to play Tap here to end

your ring choices the ring test
This tab allows you to choose an event, and for each event, choose the audio notification or sound that the
Omnii will emit for that event. For example, suppose you choose Phone: Incoming call from the Event:
drop-down menu. You can choose a specific Ring type for this event from the drop-down menu, perhaps
Vibrate and ring. In the Ring tone drop-down menu, you can choose the tone or sound of the ring. If your Omnii
vibrates and emits the ring you selected, you will immediately know your hand-held is receiving an incoming
phone call.
Choose an event from the Events drop-down menu.

Choose the Ring type and Ring tone for the event youve chosen.
To test your choice, tap on the arrow below Ring tone. The small square button stops the ring test.
Connections Folder
This folder icon contains the applets youll need to set up connections using Bluetooth and an 802.11 radio.
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections folder icon.

Beam
Enabling the Beam applet makes your Omnii visible and available to others wanting to beam information to
your unit.
Bluetooth Setup
Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area
Networks. The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When
two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a 10 meter range of each other, they can establish a connection.
Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to commu-
nicate.
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections Folder icon followed by the Bluetooth icon.
Settings 4 - 15
Turning the Bluetooth Radio On

Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with your Omnii, make certain that the Bluetooth device
power is enabled and that the radio is switched on; it is enabled by default. If, for some reason, it has been
disabled:
Scroll to the Mode tab.

Tap in the checkbox next to Turn on Bluetooth.
Turn your Bluetooth device on and place it within a few feet of your Omnii.
If needed, set your Bluetooth device to visible (discoverable) so that the hand-held can detect it and estab-
lish a connection.
The Devices Tab - Scanning for Bluetooth Devices

Scroll to the Device tab.
To discover and list all Bluetooth devices in range of the Omnii, tap on the Scan button in the softkey bar at
the bottom of the screen.
The Omnii scans for Bluetooth devices within a 10 meter range. Any Bluetooth devices within range appear in
the Bluetooth list box. Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed.
NOTE To limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device, refer to Filtering by Class
of Device (COD) in the next section.
The Clear button removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and
connected services.
Device Pop-up Menu

The Device pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a device from the list.
Pair begins the pairing process by querying the services and profiles of the discovered device. An authentica-
tion dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired.
Rename allows a new name to be assigned to a highlighted device.
Refresh Name repeats the device name query, updating the name. This command is useful if a device is listed
without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed remotely.
Delete removes this device from the list.
Filtering by Class of Device (COD)

The drop-down menu at the top of the Device tab allows you to limit the scope of the scan to a particular type
of device. If, for example, you choose Computer from this menu, only computers within range of the Omnii are
listed in the Device tab. Choosing All lists all detected devices.
Settings 4 - 17
Pairing a Device
If you intend to pair a device (a headset, for example), power the device on and bring it within 10 meters of the
Omnii before proceeding with the discovery process described below.
To pair devices:
Follow the manufacturers instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.
Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area.
When the scan is complete, tap on the device to which you want to pair.
In the pop-up menu, choose Pair.
An authentication dialog box is displayed.
If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box.
To proceed without authentication, tap on Next.
NOTE If a remote device has authentication enabled and youve skipped the authentication
process, a pop-up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to
the Omnii. Tap on Yes and type the PIN. When authentication is complete, tap on Done.
After entering the device PIN, the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device.
Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.

Click on Done.
NOTE If you choose a service requiring additional information, a dialog box is automatically
displayed where further details can be completed.
The sample dialog box below is an example of a service requiring additional information in this case, the
Serial Port Service.
This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting three different
modes: Serial, ActiveSync and Scanner.
Serial is used for simple serial port communication.

ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-over-Bluetooth.
Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth barcode and the Omnii.
Printer Port is for connection to a printer over Bluetooth.
Once youve completed the information:
Tap on Next and then in the Services screen, tap on OK.
Servers Tab
When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to the Omnii, the remote device is considered
the Bluetooth master and the hand-held, the Bluetooth slave. In order for the remote device to connect to the
Omnii, the Omnii must offer a service in the form of a server. The Servers tab allows these services to be
enabled and configured. There are three server services available: Serial, Scanner and OBEX OPP (Object
Exchange-Object Push Profile).
Settings 4 - 19
Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server; a Serial Port can be selected from the drop-down menu.
Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, an application must be open (connected) to the chosen port for a
remote device to be able to connect.
Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service (SCS). This is
used for Bluetooth barcode scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens the server port and handles the
scanner input.
OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed on the Omnii after
a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device.
Tap on the checkbox to activate the server the associated port name is displayed beside the
server name.
Mode Tab
When Turn on Bluetooth is checked, Bluetooth features are available. If this option is disabled, you cannot
send or receive information using Bluetooth.
When Discoverable is enabled, other Bluetooth devices within range (approximately 10 meters) can detect
your Omnii and can establish a bond or use a Bluetooth service. Note that other devices can detect your unit
whether or not a bond has been created.
If Allow Bluetooth to wake system is enabled, this feature allows remote Bluetooth devices to wake the Omnii
by requesting a Bluetooth service that requires host intervention. This feature can also be used, when the
Omnii is waking from suspend, to significantly to reduce the initialization time of Bluetooth system.
About Tab
Name displays the broadcasted name of the Omnii. The name can be changed in the About applet tap on
Start>Settings>System>About icon. Tap on the Device ID tab, and change the name.
Local Address displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the Bluetooth chip.
HCI Version & LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware.
Component indicates the version of the Zebra Bluetooth Subsystem (the manager, drivers, etc).
Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific Omnii.
Paired Tab
This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is <Device
Name>:<Service Name>. Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial
Profiles service.
Tap and hold down the stylus on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop-up menu.
Settings 4 - 21
This is a service-dependent menu that is, it varies slightly depending on the service chosen in the
Servers tab.
Query Services and Remove Commands
NOTE The Query Services and Remove commands are available in all service-dependent
menus, regardless of the type of service chosen.
Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen.
Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab.
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands

The OPP defines two roles a Push Server and a Push Client. Push Server is the device that provides an
object exchange server. Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server.
OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option:
Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected. When the transmis-
sion begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission.
HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands

The HSP (Headset Profile) allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio
devices.
HSP/HFP services provide the following unique menu options:
Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset.

Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset.
Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted.
Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone

Once youve completed the Bluetooth settings, you can go ahead and set up communication through your
Bluetooth-equipped phone.
Before you begin, make certain that the Bluetooth phone is turned on, that the Bluetooth radios in your Omnii
and phone are enabled (turned on), and that the hand-held and phone are within 10 metres of each other. Both
should be discoverable.
1. Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections folder icon.

2. Tap on the Connections icon. Under ISP: WWAN - GPRS, tap on Add a new modem connection.
3. Type a name for the connection.
4. Tap on the Select a modem drop-down menu, and choose Bluetooth. Tap on Next.
NOTE If you are using another device to connect to the Internet, you can choose a different
modem from the drop-down menu.
5. Make certain that the phone is discoverable. Some phones also need to be pairable in order to accept
a bonding request. Refer to your phone documentation for additional information.
Settings 4 - 23
6. If the phone appears in the My Connections list, skip to step 13. If not, go to step 7.
7. In the list, tap the phone you want to connect to, and then tap on the Next button. (Note that if your
phone is not listed, tap on Add new device, and choose the phone from the list.)
8. In the PIN screen, type a personal identification number (PIN) you can enter up to 16 characters.
9. Enter the same PIN on the phone.
10. If you wish, you can edit the name of the phone in the Name field.
11. Tap on the Finish button.
12. In the My Connections list, tap on the phone, and then on Next.
13. Enter the dial-up phone number for this connection, and tap on Next.
14. In the User name, Password and Domain fields, enter the logon information for this connection, and
tap on Finish.
You can begin using the Bluetooth phone connection, for example, to send and receive e-mail, browse the
Internet with Internet Explorer, and so on.
Connections Connecting to the Internet

To activate a connection, make certain that any necessary equipment (such as a radio) is installed in
your Omnii.
Youll need the following information from your ISP to make an Internet connection:
ISP server phone number,

user name, and
password.
Youll need to tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the Connections folder icon to display the
connections applets.
1. In the Connections screen, tap on the Connections icon.
NOTE In the Connections window, the Tasks tab is used to create new connections and man-
age existing ones. The Advanced tab allows you to choose a network. If you need to
change these settings, contact your ISP or network administrator before making
changes.
2. Under ISP: WWAN - GPRS, tap on Add a new modem connection.

3. In the Select a modem drop-down menu, choose a modem connection. If you havent already created
a modem connection, refer to Modem Connection Setup on page 4-24.
4. To connect to the Internet, launch the program you want to use. For example, launch Internet Explorer
on your Omnii to browse the Internet. Your Omnii automatically connects.
NOTE To set up a network card or wireless network connection to your ISP, add a new con-
nection under My Work Network.
Modem Connection Setup

Before you begin, youll need the following information from your ISP or network administrator: telephone
number, password, domain name, and TCP/IP settings.
If your Omnii does not have access to a mobile phone network, insert a modem card in the unit.
1. Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections folder icon followed by the Connections icon.
2. To create a new connection in either ISP: WWAN - GPRS or My Work Network, tap on Add a new
modem connection.
3. In the Make New Connection screen, type a name for the connection.
4. In the drop-down menu under Select a modem, tap on your modem type.
WARNING If your modem is not listed in the drop-down menu, choose Hayes Com-
patible on COM1.
Settings 4 - 25
5. In the My Connections screen, enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. If, for example,
you need to dial 9 for an outside line, enter 9 at the beginning of the phone number.
6. Tap on the Next button.
7. Type the User Name, Password and Domain Name as provided by your ISP or
network administrator.
NOTE Generally, you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings. For information
about Advanced Modem Settings, review the next section.
Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances:
- To change the baud rate settings, dialing string commands or credit card options.
- To change port settings.
- To enter TCP/IP settings because the server to which you are connecting does not
dynamically assign addresses.
8. Tap on the Finish button.
Advanced Modem Settings

TCP/IP Settings Tab
If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings. If you need to
make changes, contact your ISP or network administrator for addresses.
Server Settings Tab

If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings.
Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer names to IP addresses. The
Omnii supports a variety of name resolution options: DNS, Alt DNS, WINS and Alt WINS.
Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need, and can also provide the
server address. In addition, you will want to ask if alternate addresses are available. An alternate address may
allow you to connect when the primary server is not available.
Domain Enroll
To protect sensitive company data, businesses use firewalls and proxy servers to limit access to company
resources to company employees only. If you need to access information on your company server remotely,
the Domain Enrollment utility allows you to sync your Omnii credentials with your company enrollment server,
allowing you to access your work remotely.
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Domain Enroll.

Settings 4 - 27
Tap on the Enroll button.
Enter your enrollment password supplied by your company's network administrator or generated from
your company pre-enrollment wizard.
Type your company e-mail address and the enrollment password provided by your network
administrator.
NOTE If you uncheck Automatically discover server, a Server field is displayed where you
must manually enter the server name.
Allow a few minutes for your Omnii to sync and enroll in your company domain. You may need to restart your
unit after the enrollment process is completed.
Network Cards
When the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time, the Network Settings screen is displayed auto-
matically so that you can configure the card. If it does not appear, or if you want to change settings:
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections.
Tap on the Network Cards icon.
If you need to specify server information, double-tap on the appropriate adaptor, and then tap on the IP
Address and/or Name Servers tab.
NOTE Because most networks use DHCP, you should not need to change these settings
unless instructed to do so by your network administrator.
If necessary, use a network cable to connect the network card to your network. Refer to the documentation
shipped with your network card for details.
To activate the connection, launch the desired program (e.g., Internet Explorer). The Omnii will connect
automatically.
Changing Network Card Settings

If you use your network card in two locations like work and home, youll need to change the network to
which the network card connects.
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections>Network Cards.
Settings 4 - 29
In the Configure Network Adapters dialog box, tap on the drop-down menu below My network card con-
nects to, and choose either The Internet or Work.
VPN Connection Setup

A VPN connection provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet.
Before you begin, you need the following information from your network administrator: password, domain
name, TCP/IP settings and a host name or IP address of the VPN server.
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections folder icon followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network, tap on Add a new VPN server connection.

In the Name field, type a name for this connection.

In Host name/IP, type the VPN server name or IP address.
Tap on the VPN type radio button next to the type of authentication for your Omnii: IPSec/L2TP or PPTP.
Your network administrator will let you know which option applies to your unit.
Tap on Next.
Choose the type of authentication in this screen. If you choose A pre-shared key, type the key provided by
your network administrator.
Tap on Next.
Type your user name, password and domain name. If a domain name was not provided to you, try the
connection without entering a domain name.
NOTE Normally, you will not need to change any advanced settings. You will need to make
changes only under only the following circumstances:
- The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses, and
TCP/IP settings need to be entered.
- Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed.
If you need to edit the Advanced settings, refer to Advanced Modem Settings on page 4-25 for details about
this tab.
Tap on Finish.
Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection. The VPN connection will start
automatically.
Managing an Existing Connection

Once youve defined a connection, a new option appears in the first Connections screen Manage
existing connections.
Editing a Connection
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections folder icon. Tap on the Connections icon.
Tap on Manage existing connections.
Tap here
To launch a connection from this screen, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to activate.
Choose Connect from the pop-up menu.
To delete a connection, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to delete. Choose Delete
from the pop-up menu.
Settings 4 - 31
NOTE You can also create a new connection by tapping on the New button. To make
changes to the settings for this connection, tap on Edit.
Changing a Connection Setting Name

Your Omnii has two sets of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. If you want to change one or
both of these options to something more familiar to you, follow these steps.
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections folder icon followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network or My ISP, tap on Manage existing connections.
Tap on the General tab.
Type the name you prefer in the field below Enter a name for these settings.
Tap on OK.
Proxy Server Tab
NOTE If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchronization, the Omnii
will download the appropriate settings during synchronization from your PC. If these
settings are not on your PC, or if they need to be changed, youll need to set up the
proxy server connection manually.
To set up the proxy server connection manually, youll need the following information: proxy server name,
server type, port, type of Socks protocol used, and the user name and password.
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon.
Under My Work Network, tap on Set up my proxy server.
Tap in the checkbox next to This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy
server to connect to the Internet.
In the Proxy server field, type the proxy server name.
NOTE If you need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy server type,
youll need to tap on the Advanced button rather than tapping on OK. Advanced set-
tings are described in Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings in the next section.
Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings

To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type, tap on the Advanced button.
Tap on the proxy type you want to change. For the appropriate server type, type the proxy server name
and port.
Tap on OK.
Selecting a Network
NOTE Normally, you will not need to change these settings. Contact your ISP or network
administrator before making any changes.
Private networks are used for work-related activities. Internet networks are used for home connection to your
ISP. The My Work Network settings are used for private network connections (corporate networks), while My
ISP settings are used for Internet network connections.
When you use programs such as Internet Explorer, your Omnii automatically connects using private network
settings under My Work Network or Internet settings under My ISP, depending on specifications. You can
determine how your Omnii connects.
Tap Start>Settings>Connections folder icon.
Tap on the Connections icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.
Settings 4 - 33
Tap on Select Networks.

In the appropriate list, choose My ISP or My Work Network.
Wi-Fi Config - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio

Omnii contains an integrated 802.11a/b/g/n radio module. The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the
radio for one or more wireless network profiles. Follow the steps in this section to help configure the radio in
your unit.
NOTE To configure your Bluetooth settings, go to Bluetooth Setup on page 4-14.
To see specifications for this radio, refer to Appendix E: Omnii Specifications.
A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set Identifier) and security options.
NOTE In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter
settings and access keys from a network administrator.
To launch the Wi-Fi Config application:
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections folder icon.

Tap on the Wi-Fi Config icon.
The Wi-Fi screen is displayed:

Wi-Fi Config: Status Tab

The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which Omnii is configured to connect. When
there are no network profiles configured, this tab is not populated.
Disable/Enable Radio: This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio depending on whether
the radio is turned off or on.
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
NOTE If the Configure tab is not visible, open the Advanced tab, uncheck Use Win-
dows to configure my wireless settings, and reset the Omnii.
To configure the radio for a wireless network, tap on the Configure tab.
Settings 4 - 35
Connect: Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration.

Add New: Used to create a new wireless network configuration.
Edit: Used to change values in an existing wireless network configuration.
Remove: Used to delete a wireless network configuration.
Scan: Used to detect and list available wireless networks. You can highlight a network in the list, and tap
on Add New to activate the network.
There are two methods available when configuring a radio network you can either scan for an existing
network or manually create a network. If you tap on the Scan button, a list of networks detected by the radio is
displayed. Highlighting one of the listed networks and tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that
is completed based on the security capabilities detected by the radio. You may need to add additional informa-
tion, depending on your network requirements.
If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button, you can create a network manually.
IMPORTANT The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in
mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your
own network requirements. If, for example, you are using a different
type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not
match those described here.
Manually Creating a Network

In the Configure tab, tap on the Add New button.
Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for your network.
Authentication Mode
Omnii supports several classes of authentication Open, WEP, WPA/WPA2 (Personal PSK, Enterprise,
CCKM-WPA, CCKM-WPA2), and 802.1x with EAP. Tapping on the Auth. Mode menu displays your
authentication options.
NOTE Each Auth. Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields
appropriate to the authorization mode youve chosen.
Open Authentication
Open authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, Omnii will connect to wireless
networks which do not use authentication or encryption.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network. If you choose this
option, you can specify the type of WEP authentication Open or Shared, the WEP security key length 64 bit
or 128 bit and the key type ASCII or Hex. WEP Key fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13
ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP
key on the access point.
802.1X, WPA & WPA2 Enterprise, CCKM-WPA & CCKM-WPA2

These authentication modes use 802.1X with EAP authentication. When 802.1X is selected, Omnii uses WEP
encryption with automatic (as opposed to static) keying. For the others, you may choose TKIP, AES or
TKIP+AES encryption.
Settings 4 - 37
WPA & WPA2 Personal PSK (Pre-Shared Key)

When PSK is selected, either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSK a shared key must be configured
on both the access point and the hand-held computer. One of the following can be chosen from the Encryption
drop-down menu: TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES.
Encryption
The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data.
Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the drop-down menu. Only the Encryption options
that are compatible with the type of Auth. Mode youve chosen will be listed. In fact, in some cases, this menu
will not be available at all.
EAP
This menu allows you to choose the EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) type used for 802.1x authentica-
tion to an access point.
The following EAP types are supported by Wi-Fi Config:
FAST-MSCHAPv2: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against
off-line dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates
and supports Windows Active Directory and domains.
LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP does not require the
use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the
use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off-line dictionary attacks.
PEAPv0-MSCHAPv2: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traffic.
MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method. This is appropriate for use against Windows
Active Directory and domains.
PEAPv1-GTC: PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one time passwords
(OTPs) for authentication against OTP databases such as SecureID.
TLS: Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication.
Verify Server Certificate

When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked, the Omnii will verify the certificate provided by the authenti-
cation server during the authentication process. This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually
installed on Omnii for the verification.
Enable OPMK
When used with compatible wireless infrastructure, Opportunistic Key Caching (OPMK) reduces the number of
full authentications required when roaming. This option is only visible when WPA2-Enterprise (EAP) authenti-
cation mode is chosen.
Connecting the Wireless Network

Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab. An [X] next to a network indicates that this is the network
to which Omnii will connect.
Settings 4 - 39
Tap on the Connect button to activate your network.
The Status tab is displayed. The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802.11a/b/g/n radio attempts to
connect to the network. Once the association is complete, the Status tab is populated with the appropriate
information about your network.
Configuring TCP/IP
If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.
IP Address and Name Servers

To assign an IP Address for the Omnii:
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections folder icon>Wireless Manager icon.

Tap on the Menu button, and choose Wi-Fi Settings.
In the Wi-Fi screen, use the scroll bar at the top of the screen to scroll to the Network Adapters tab.
Tap on tiwlnapi1.
The IP Address screen offers two options: a server-assigned IP address or a user-assigned IP address.
If you want an address assigned automatically:
Tap on Use server-assigned IP address to have an address assigned automatically, or
If you want to define your own IP address:
Tap on Use specific IP address.

Type the preferred IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway.
Settings 4 - 41
Name Servers
If you tap on the Name Servers tab at the top of the screen, you can statically configure the DNS servers;
however, if you use DHCP for IP address assignment, DNS is usually supplied by the same server that
supplied the IP addresses.
Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Tab

This screen provides a number of options which are described in this section.
Country Options
IMPORTANT 802.11d is enabled by default for auto-country detection. If you are having diffi-
culty associating with your access point, you may need to disable 802.11d and
choose your country.
In the Wi-Fi Config>Advanced tab, choose Country Option. In the drop-down

menu, choose your country.
Wireless Zero Config

If you prefer to use Wireless Zero Config, the Windows native supplicant, to configure the radio:
Tap on the Advanced tab, and tap on the checkbox to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless
settings to add a check mark and activate this option.
Tap here to add a check mark

to activate Windows radio
configuration.
Network Type
This option allows you to select the full set or a sub-set of the IEEE 802.11 wireless network protocols. You can
choose from the following:
b only: forces the radio to operate in the 2.4GHz band only. The hand-held will only associate with an
Access Point (AP) that supports the DSSS data rates 1, 2, 5.5 & 11 Mbps. This mode has the lowest data
rate but yields the longest range.
b/g only: forces the radio to operate in the 2.4 GHz band only. The Omnii will only associate with an AP
that supports the DSSS data rates 1, 2, 5.5 & 11 Mbps and OFDM data rates: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48,
54Mbps. This mode offers the same range as b only mode but with higher data rate of 54 Mbps when
possible
a only: forces the radio to operate in the 5 GHz band only. The hand-held will only associate with an AP
that supports the OFDM data rates: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps.
11n Mode
This radio supports MIMO data rates in both 2.4 GHz and 5 G band (although it only supports single stream
operation (SISO)). This increases the maximum data rate to 65 Mbps.
Enabled: If this option is enabled, it is activated for the band or bands that were selected in Network type.
For example, if Network Type = b only, 11n is only switched on for the 2.4GHz band.
11n Block Ack

When 11n Block Ack is enabled, the Omnii will not send an ACK for every packet received, but it will
send an ACK after a block of data is received. The duration of time before sending an ACK is negotiated with
the AP.
Power Save Mode

If Power Save Mode is enabled, the radio remains on continuously. The disadvantage to enabling this option
is increased power consumption. The advantage to enabling this option is instant response to TCP/IP traffic.
It is recommended that Power Save Mode be enabled to increase battery run time. It should only be disabled if
the application is sensitive to timing.
Roaming - AP Density
The Roaming - AP Density setting controls how aggressively the Omnii attempts to roam. The available
options are High, Medium, and Low with High providing the most aggressive roaming and Low providing the
least aggressive roaming.
Wireless Manager
The Wireless Manager icon acts as a connection manager, providing access to all network connection types.
Tap on Start>Settings>Connections folder icon. Tap on the Wireless Manager icon.
This screen is used to switch the wireless network connection on and off. This screen also provides access to
the setup screens for each wireless connection.
To turn connections on and off, tap on the item(s) in the list.

To turn off all wireless connections, tap on All.
The Menu softkey at the bottom of the screen provides a shortcut to the setup screens for each of the options
listed in the Wireless Manager screen.
Settings 4 - 43
Personal Folder
Tap on Start>Settings>Personal icon.
App Launch Keys
This icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single
key-press.
To assign an application key:
Tap the Add button.
Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is pressed, a message
appears on this screen letting you know.)
The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to
which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse through the information in your
hand-held until you locate the application you want to launch.
Once youve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK.
The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to assign special parameters to your
application launch key. If you dont want to assign any parameters, you can leave the Data field blank. If, for
Settings 4 - 45
example, you want to assign an application launch key to launch the Word Mobile application, you can leave
this field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the Word
Mobile application, you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field.
Tap on OK.
If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it from this final screen. Other-
wise, tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key.
To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.
Buttons
A number of apps are included under this icon.
Tap on the Start>Settings>Personal>Buttons icon to display the apps.
Program Buttons Tab

In the Program Buttons tab, you can customize the program hardware buttons to open your most
used programs.
Under Select a button, tap on the button to which you want to assign a program.
Choose a program from the Assign drop-down menu.
Up/Down Control Tab
Tap on Start>Settings>Personal>Buttons icon to display this screen. Scroll to the

Up/Down Control tab.
Sliding the Delay before first repeat bar to the left decreases the delay between key repeats while sliding the
bar to the right increases the repeat delay time.
Sliding the Repeat rate bar to the left slows the rate at which an [Up/Down] button repeats when pressed.
Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate.
OneShots
The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Omnii behave. For each modifier key
[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [SYM] and [BLUE/FN] you have the following options in the drop-down menu:
Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.
IMPORTANT Once youve assigned a OneShot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap
on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.
Lock
If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it on until you press the
modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.
OneShot
If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.
Settings 4 - 47
OneShot/Lock
OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you press the modifier
key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.
If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked on, remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third
time to turn it off.
Macro Keys
A macro key is a single keypress that can be configured to output up to 200 characters (including [ENTER],
[BACKSPACE], [DEL], function keys, arrow keys, etc.). This feature can save time and effort when entering
frequently used key sequences. For example, a macro key can be programmed to output a standard signature,
such as Sincerely yours,[ENTER]Bob with a single keypress.
For all keyboard types, you can program up to 15 macro keys. Some Omnii keyboards have macros keys
([M1], [M2] and so on) that are physically present on the keyboard. When you record a macro sequence and
assign it to one of these predetermined macro keys, pressing that key (e.g., [M1]) executes the macro and
sends the programmed key sequence to the hand-held as if it were entered from the keyboard.
If your keyboard does not have dedicated macro keys, or if you wish to use macro keys beyond the ones that
are already present on the keyboard, you need to use Scancode Remapping to remap keyboard keys to act as
macro keys (see Scancode Remapping on page 4-49). For example, if you record a key sequence to Macro
7, you could then use Scancode Remapping to remap the [z] key so that pressing it executes Macro 7 rather
than the letter [z].
Recording and Saving a Macro

In the Macro menu, highlight a Macro number. Tap on the Record button.
A Record Macro screen is displayed.

Type the macro sequence you want to assign to a keyboard key. You can type text and numbers, and you
can program the function of special keys into a macro.
When youve finished recording your macro sequence, tap on the Stop Recording button.
A new screen displays the macro sequence you created.
Tap on the Save button to save your macro. Your macro key sequence is listed in the Macro screen.
Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment.
Executing a Macro
To execute a macro, press the key to which youve assigned the macro.
NOTE Keep in mind that if you plan to program additional macros beyond the Macro keys on
your keyboard, or if your keyboard is not equipped with dedicated macro keys, you
will need to use Scancode Remapping on page 4-49 to assign a keyboard key that
will act as a macro key.
Deleting a Macro
In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.
Tap on the Delete button.
Unicode Mapping
Tap on the Unicode Mapping tab to display this screen.
The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to
Unicode values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For
example, a (U+0061) indicates that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061, and so on.
Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values.
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value, and then
by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default
Unicode value.
Adding and Changing Unicode Values
NOTE Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Unicode Mapping tab
by tapping on [OK].
Settings 4 - 49
Tap on the Add/Edit button.
Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list.

Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key.
NOTE To add a shifted state [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], tap on the checkbox next to SHIFT
Pressed and/or CTRL Pressed.
Removing Unicode Values

In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
Scancode Remapping
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scan-
code that is mapped to a virtual key, a function, or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the
functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents
the F key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on,
change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.
There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the FN table and the SYM table.
The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the FN table defines key presses that occur when the
[FN/BLUE] modifier is on; the SYM table defines key presses that occur when the [SYM] modifier is on.
The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using
Scancode Remapping.
The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal. If the scancode is
remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the column labelled V-Key. In the column labelled
Function, virtual keys that are Shifted or Unshifted are displayed.
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain blank while the third
column contains the function name or macro key number (e.g., Macro 2).
Adding a Remap
To add a new remapping:
Tap the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.
The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.
Type the scancode in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode.
NOTE The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.
Virtual Key, Function and Macro

The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scancode will be remapped to:
Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the virtual key is sent. If No
Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key
is sent.
When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.
When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.
Choose Virtual Key>Function or Macro.

Choose a function from the Function list, and tap on OK.
Editing a Scancode Remap
In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.
Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.
Removing a Remap
In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the Menu button,
and choose Remove.
Tap on OK.
Settings 4 - 51
Lock Sequence Tab

The Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the hand-held keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed acci-
dentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.
To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence.
Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup.
In the Key sequence drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you need to type to unlock the keyboard.
Reset the Omnii press and hold down the [BLUE/FN] key and the Power button.
NOTE It is useful to leave the Show popup message enabled (default) so that anyone
attempting to use the Omnii keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to
enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.
A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.
Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.
The Phone Managing Settings

An optional phone feature is available for your Omnii hand-held. This section details how to tailor phone
settings like the ring type and tone, phone services, and so on.
IMPORTANT For details about sending and ending calls, making conference calls,
managing contacts, and so on, refer to The Phone on page 3-4.
You can adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone, choose phone services such as barring calls,
and so on. There are a number of ways you can access phone settings.
In the Navigation Bar, tap on the Phone Settings hotkey.

First, tap here to display your options.
Next, tap on the Phone

Settings hotkey.
In the pop-up Phone bubble, tap on the Settings link, or
Tap on Start>Settings>Personal icon>Phone icon.

Settings 4 - 53
Phone: Sounds Tab
Ring Type and Ring Tone

The SIM card phone number is displayed at the top of this screen. The Ring Type drop-down menu allows you
to tailor the type of ring used for incoming calls. The Ring Tone drop-down menu allows you to determine the
ring tone of incoming phone calls. To test the ring type and tone youve chosen, you can tap on the Play button
just below the Ring tone menu. Tap on the Stop button to end the sound test.
NOTE For details about setting up Ring type and Ring tone to help you identify other
events such as successful scans, missed calls, voice mails, and so on, refer to Noti-
fications Tab on page 4-13.
Keypad
This option allows you to determine the type of sound that keypad keys emit as you press them. You can also
turn off keypad sounds.
Phone: Security Tab
Tap in the checkbox

(add a check mark)
to enable PIN Security.
This option allows you to enable or change a PIN (Personal Identification Number) so that your phone function
is protected from unauthorized use. Your SIM card manufacturer provides the default PIN which you can
change in this field.
Changing a PIN
Tap on the Change PIN button and use the phone keypad to enter your existing SIM card PIN. Tap on the
[Enter] button in the phone keypad.
IMPORTANT If you enter an incorrect PIN, a message is displayed letting you

know that youll need to reenter the correct value.
You have a limited number of chances to enter the correct PIN. The
number varies for different services. If you exceed this number, the
SIM will be disabled automatically. You will be asked to enter a PUK
(Personal Unlocking Key). In some cases, the PUK is printed some-
where on your SIM package. If this is not the case, you will need to
call customer support.
Once youve entered the correct PIN, a new screen appears asking that you enter your new PIN.
Type your new PIN a number consisting of between 4 and 8 digits. Tap on Enter.
A new message lets you know that you need to confirm your new PIN.
Retype your new PIN. Tap on [Enter] when youre finished.
Enabling PIN Security

To activate PIN security:
Tap in the checkbox to the left of Require PIN when phone is used.
When security is enabled, you will be prompted to enter a PIN before you are allowed to use the phone.
NOTE Whenever this option is enabled or disabled, you will be asked to enter your PIN.
Settings 4 - 55
Phone: Services Tab
The Services tab allows you to customize the behaviour of your phone. You can, for example, block all
incoming calls, tailor to whom your caller ID will be transmitted, set up call forwarding and so on.
NOTE Keep in mind that some services may not be supported by your network, or they
may not have been subscribed to.
Tap on the service you want to set up. Tap on Get Settings.
The service dialog boxes allow you to tailor your available services to meet your requirements.
Voice Mail Setup

If your service includes Voice Mail, choosing this option for the first time displays a screen in which you can
enter your voice mail provider phone number.
Phone: Network Tab
NOTE For details about choosing networks, refer to Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area
Network (WWAN), Network Configuration on page G-8.
Phone: Data Tab
This screen is used to configure your WWAN data connection to the ISP.
NOTE For details about setting up your data connection, refer to Appendix G: Wireless
Wide Area Network (WWAN), Establishing a Packet Data Connection on
page G-3.
Phone: Bands Tab
By default, all frequency bands are enabled. Bands should not be disabled without knowledge about
which bands are used by your network; an incorrect setting will prevent the WWAN modem from finding
the network.
Phone: Diagnostics Tab

Settings 4 - 57
The Diagnostics tab lists details about each network found. The information in this screen may be useful to
support personnel if they are attempting to diagnose a problem with your network.
Phone: Hearing Aid Mode Tab
When Hearing Aid Mode is enabled, the audio path is altered to accommodate those using a magnetically
coupled hearing aid (T-coil).
System Folder
Tap on Start>Settings>System icon to display a group of system apps.
About
Tapping on Start>Settings>System tab, and then the About icon displays a grouping of tabs that provide
device information.
Version Tab
This tab outlines the Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5 Professional version, processor information, memory
size and a description of the expansion card, if one is in use.
Device ID Tab
This tab provides fields in which you can assign a Device name and Description (optional) for the Omnii. This
name is used by the Omnii to identify itself to other devices.
Keep in mind that this must be a unique name across a network. If you are unable to connect to a network
because another device with the same name is already connected, youll need to assign a new name here.
Copyrights
The Copyrights tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on your Omnii.
Backlight Screen and Keypad

Tapping on Start>Settings>System icon followed by the Backlight icon allows you to determine the backlight
and power properties of the Omnii.
Settings 4 - 59
Battery Power Tab
This tab allows you to tailor the Omnii backlight behaviour to best preserve battery life.
To define how long the backlight should stay on when the Omnii is not in use, tap in the checkbox to the left
of Turn off backlight if device is not used for.
NOTE This option is essentially suspend mode. If the backlight is turned off, tapping on the
screen or pressing a key displays the screen in which you were working before the
backlight turned off.
Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the number of seconds or minutes the backlight will remain on
when the hand-held is idle.
To Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped, tap in the checkbox to the left
of this option.
External Power Tab
This tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the hand-held is using external rather than battery
power. Refer to the instructions in Battery Power Tab on page 4-59 for details.
Backlight Tab
Screen
backlight
Keypad
backlight
This tab allows you to tailor the backlight behaviour of the Omnii screen and keypad to best preserve
battery life. The top sliding button adjusts the screen brightness while the bottom sliding button adjusts the
keypad brightness.
Slide the buttons to the left to decrease brightness and to the right to increase brightness.
Certificates
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System icon.
Tap on the Certificates icon.
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificates listed in the Certificates tabs ensure that the
submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the submitter. The hand-held checks that the
certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the hand-held explicitly trusts.
Your Omnii has certificates already preinstalled in the unit. Personal certificates establish your identity, interme-
diate certificates, as the name suggests, identify intermediate certification authorities and root certificates
establish the identity of the servers with which you can connect.
Choosing a Certificate
Normally, certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically by the Omnii. If a certificate
cannot be chosen automatically, you must choose it from the Certificates list.
To choose a certificate, tap the desired certificate. Your Omnii will connect automatically.
Settings 4 - 61
Personal Tab
The Personal tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.
To view additional information about a personal certificate, tap on a certificate in the list.
To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete until a pop-up menu is dis-
played. Tap on the Delete command.
Intermediate Certificates
The items in this list help identify intermediate certification authorities.
Root Certificates
To view details about a certificate who issued the certificate, to whom it was issued, the issue date and
the expiry date tap on a certificate in the list.
To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on a certificate. In the pop-up menu, tap on Delete.
Compass
Like all compasses, the Omnii compass indicates the direction in which the unit is pointed.
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System icon.

Tap on the Compass icon.
If you find that the compass is inaccurate, you may need to calibrate it.
Tap on the Calibrate button and follow the directions to calibrate the compass. Make certain that
you perform the figure 8 indicated in the instructions in a fairly wide loop to better ensure
successful calibration.
When the compass calibration is complete, a message appears on the Omnii screen indicating successful cali-
bration.
NOTE The accuracy of the compass is affected by the following:

a) close proximity to large magnets or metal structures, and
b) internal scanner/imager activation.

Settings 4 - 63
Contrast
Tapping on the Contrast icon displays a screen in which you can tailor the screen contrast.
Drag the sliding button between Light and Dark to achieve the desired screen colour contrast.
Customer Feedback
This option allows Microsoft to track how you use your Omnii so that they can make improvements to the soft-
ware. The radio buttons in this screen allow you to turn this feature on or off.
Dr. Debug
Dr. Debug is an error diagnostic tool.
Tap on Start>Settings>System. Tap on the Dr. Debug icon.

Status
This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the tools. Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review.
Utilities
There are a number of utilities available through Dr. Debug. The NetLog utility is used to log network traffic.
The RilLog utility captures Radio Interface Layer (RIL) debug outputs. When you tap on the Start button, debug
data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Zebra technician for evaluation.
The Utilities tab also provides a HeaterLog that can be used to log heater control logic board information.
Settings 4 - 65
Motion Meter
Tapping on the Start button enables the Motion Meter feature. Once enabled, this applet records the number of
impacts the Omnii has sustained, the distance of the fall in meters, the duration in 10ths of a second, and the
date and time that the event occurred. The top 40 events are logged in a non-volatile location and can be used
for diagnostic purposes by Zebra or the site administrator.
Settings
Choose an Error Level from the drop-down menu.

To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the right of the Log
Folder option.
Encryption
This option allows you to encrypt the data on your storage card.
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Encryption icon.

Error Reporting
Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System icon followed by the Error Reporting icon.
GPS (Global Positioning System)

With a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, you can locate your exact position on a map. However, even
without a GPS receiver, several different mapping programs can run on your Omnii.
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>GPS icon.

Settings 4 - 67
Tap on the GPS program port drop-down menu, and choose the communication port that the GPS soft-
ware will use to communicate with the GPS receiver.
NOTE Your Omnii may automatically detect the GPS receiver that you are using and enter
the settings in the Hardware tab. If not, youll need to enter this information yourself.
You can find this information in the user manual of the GPS receiver.
Windows Embedded Hand-Held automatically manages access to the GPS receiver. However, some
programs may not work with automatic configuration. If this is the case:
Tap on the Access tab, and disable Manage GPS automatically (recommended).
You can go to:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsphone/en-gb/howto/wp7/web/use-maps-to-find-a-place.aspx
if a map-viewing program is not included with your Omnii, and copy the file to your Omnii.
Tap on the Hardware tab, and set the GPS hardware port to COM2. Set the Baud rate to 4800.
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings

This applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates. You can determine when the GPS module can
draw power and under what conditions, and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem. You can
also set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System).
Tap on Start>Settings>System>GPS Settings icon.
Power Tab
This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves. The GPS Power drop-down menu is used to
control when the GPS is powered on and off.
Off the GPS module is left off, always.

Always on the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the Omnii (sus-
pend mode).
On, and off in suspend the GPS module is powered on, but if the Omnii is in suspend mode, the GPS
module is turned off.
Settings 4 - 69
Profiles
Tapping on the GPS Profile Selection drop-down menu allows you to choose an appropriate profile: Default,
Automotive or Pedestrian.
Default profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses.

Automotive profile is designed for in-vehicle use, providing quick location updates as the vehicle moves.
When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an area such as a tunnel where satellite
coverage is interrupted, it will attempt to predict the vehicle position.
Pedestrian profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking. It takes into account the
slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user. When the GPS module is set to this
profile and the operator moves into an area where satellite coverage is interrupted, the GPS module will
not attempt to predict the operators movement.
AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) Tab
To determine your location, a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit
around the Earth. The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to
and from the satellites. This works well in fairly clear areas outdoors, for example. However, if youre
attempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from
within a building, the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix.
AGPS reduces Time To First Fix (TTFF) and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor
coverage areas such as indoor sites. AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris (orbital) data to the Omnii periodi-
cally through Wi-Fi or WWAN. The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of
getting a fix.
Update
Click on the Update button to download Extended Ephemeris (EE) files from a secure host on the internet
using any interface that has an internet connection (WWAN or Wi-Fi). These files contain several days
worth of ephemeris (orbital) data that can be used if the satellites broadcast ephemeris is not available.
The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download, and once successfully down-
loaded, the Status field will read Idle.
Settings
Click on the Settings softkey to define the AGPS server connection settings.
The AGPS server connection settings drop-down menu allows you to choose from two settings: Use default
settings and Use custom settings.
The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications. Note that aside from the Update
field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your Omnii, the field values cannot be edited.
The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an intranet
rather than the Internet and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified Zebra personnel. They will
be able to help you configure your Zebra device(s) and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data.
Info Tab
This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version, the date on which
files were last updated, and so on. If GPS module support service is required, you may be asked to tap on the
Save button in this tab and forward the information to Zebra support staff.
Settings 4 - 71
Imagers Settings
The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings. The principle uses of the
applet are to decode barcodes and to capture images.
To launch this applet:
Tap on Start>Settings>System, and then tap on the Imagers icon.
IMPORTANT Refer to Appendix B: Imagers Applet for setup details.
An Imager & Camera demo applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager and camera work.
To launch the demo applet:
Tap on the Start>Demo folder icon. Then, tap on the Imager And Camera icon
NOTE You can also launch the Imager Applet from within the demo screen. Tap on the
Settings drop-down menu and choose Advanced.
Manage Triggers
Manage Triggers allows you to configure how barcode scanners and other devices are triggered. You can
configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.
Tap on Start>Settings>System>Manage Triggers icon.
Trigger Mappings
A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application, the
module(s) sometimes referred to as trigger consumer(s) of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys,
trigger sources can also be grip triggers, external hardware triggers or software-based. When the specified key
is pressed, the trigger consumer (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.
IMPORTANT It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings for example
[F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice even if the
trigger type is different.
A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate

key data or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button
is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to
applications.
Double-Click
When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between 0 to 1000 milli-
seconds), a double-click occurs. See also Trigger Press Type on page 4-74.
Show All Modules

By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or applications that are
not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this checkbox, all mappings, both active and inac-
tive, are displayed.
Add
Tapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog (see below), so that you can add new trigger mappings.
Settings 4 - 73
Edit
Tapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog, so that you can edit existing trigger mappings.
Remove
Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.
OK
The OK button in the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the [ESC] key is pressed, all
changes are discarded.
Add and Edit Trigger Mapping

Tap on Add to add a new trigger map, or tap on Edit to edit an existing trigger map.
Trigger Key
This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Grip Trigger, Left Scan,
etc., for the trigger module selected.
NOTE It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers) for
example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/opera-
tions will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially
with devices such as Imagers.
It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer).
Add Key
Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to this list, tap on the
Add Key button. A dialog box pops up, allowing you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.
Trigger Press Type

You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally, when a trigger
(keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a trigger down event is sent to the owner that is, the applica-
tion receiving the trigger press information followed by a trigger up. If Double Click is chosen in this menu,
when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a double-click event will occur. If a mapping
with the Up/down type has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of
trigger events.
Module to Trigger
This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.
Show All Modules

By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both active and inactive,
are displayed.
Managed Programs
Managed Programs lets you view, download and install applications that are deployed by the System Center
Mobile Device Manager (a server-side solution that helps enable IT to have control of their device deployment
with respect to security, management and access to the corporate network).
To access Managed Programs:
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab>Managed Programs icon.
NOTE The system administrator can provide the details needed Managed
Programs effectively.
Memory
This applet allows you to view memory use and storage card memory allocation. To display the options for this
applet:
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System tab followed by the Memory icon.
Settings 4 - 75
Main Tab
This tab lists the memory allocated for file and data storage and for program storage.
Storage Card
The Storage Card screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory along with the amount in use.
Microphone
Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held.
Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain.
Slide the tab at the top of the dialog box to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase
the gain.
Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone youve chosen to the default gain. Tapping on
Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain.
PartnerUp
Tapping on this icon displays a number of pre-loaded applications. Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an
associated web site.
The operator can then install the application. If a license is required, it can be obtained by sending an e-mail to
the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Rep from the Zebra contact web page.
http://www.zebra.com/US-EN/Pages/Contact_Us/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_about_contact_psion-offices
Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Zebra.
Tapping on a preloaded client in the PartnerUp screen displays a drop-down menu from which the operator can
choose from an array of related options.
Quick Defrost (Heater Settings)
The Quick Defrost applet provides a number of tools to monitor and configure the heaters installed in the Omnii
XT15f freezer units.
Kiosk
the look of the Today screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items best accessed
using a stylus.
Settings 4 - 77
Tap on Start>Settings>System>Kiosk icon.
If an administrator password is not yet set, this is indicated at the bottom of this screen. Tapping on the Admin-
istrator Password option displays the following screen.
Type a New password, and then re-enter it in the Confirm new password field.
NOTE Once an administrative password is assigned, each time Kiosk is launched, a dialog
box will be displayed requesting the password.
Kiosk Menu
The Kiosk menu provides access to the categories to help you tailor the look and operation of the Omnii for
the user.
Administrator Password
If you want to change an existing password, you need to complete the Administrator Password screen:
Tap on the Administrator password option, and type your current password.
In the next field, type a New password. Retype the new password in the Confirm new password field,
and tap on OK.
Shell Settings
The Shell Settings option allows the administrator to tailor what operators see and what is available to them
when Omnii is powered on. Note that these changes are not visible until the unit switches from Administrator
Mode to User Mode. A Kiosk Access screen, the screen in which you can switch from Administrator to User
Mode, is displayed automatically once youve finished making changes and have tapped on OK.
Applications Tab
This tab allows the administrator to choose the applications that will be available to the user.
Tap in the checkbox next to each application you want displayed on the Today screen.
Once the Omnii is set to User Mode, the selected items from the Application screen are listed in the
Today screen. A Kiosk Access screen, the screen in which you can switch from Administrator to User Mode, is
displayed automatically once youve finished making changes and have tapped on OK. See Activating a
Change User Mode on page 193 details.
Settings 4 - 79
The look of the Today screen differs significantly from the original version, appearing as a list of available items
more suitable for a stylus than finger touch.
Adding Applications
The Add and Edit buttons allow you to search for applications in the storage areas on your Omnii (e.g.,
Windows, My Device, etc.), and add applications to the list of items in the Today screen.
You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the Add button is greyed out. and the following
message is displayed: Maximum 18 entries reached.
To add additional applications that will be accessible to the user from the Today screen, tap on the Add
button at the bottom of the Application screen. The Select File screen is displayed.
Tap here
The View drop-down menu at the top of this screen displays the storage areas in the Omnii.
Tapping on a storage area Windows for example displays the applications you can add to the Today screen
from that storage area.
Advanced Tab
This tab provides a number of options to restrict what is available on start up.
Start Button and Notification Restrictions

The drop-down menu at the top of the Advanced tab allows you to limit access to the Notifications at the top of
the screen and the Start button at the bottom of the screen.
When you choose an option, for example, Disable access to Start and Notifications, the sample bar below the
drop-down menu marks the disallowed items in red.
Settings 4 - 81
Kiosk App Restrictions

To remove Kiosk from the Start screen:
Tap in the checkbox next to Administrator access in Start Menu to deselect it. The x should not be present
in the checkbox.
The Administrator Key Sequence drop-down menu provides three key sequences you can use to gain access
to Kiosk when it is not accessible from the Start screen.
NOTE If you disable Administrator access in Start Menu or if you Disable Start, the only
way to access Kiosk or the Start screen applications is to type an Administrator Key
Sequence. In these cases, it is important that you make note of the key sequence
youve chosen.
Launching an Application at Startup

If you enable Launch an application on Startup, a screen is displayed where you can choose the application
that will be launched automatically when the Omnii is powered up.
Tap here
Tap in the checkbox next to Launch an application at Startup.

Tap in the View menu at the top of the Select File screen, and choose the storage area from which you
want to choose an application.
Next, tap on the application you want the Omnii to launch on startup.
Your choice is displayed in the Advanced tab.
Startup program
Tap on OK.
NOTE Remember that changes do not take effect until the Omnii is set to User Mode and
the unit is reset.
Settings 4 - 83
Phone Tab
The Phone tab allows you to define the phone buttons accessibility on the Omnii keyboard by choosing an item
from the Configure the Phone Dialer buttons drop-down menu.
the unit is reset.
Restrictions
The Restrictions screen allows the administrator to restrict access to applications.
the unit is reset. Refer to Activating a Change User Mode on page 4-87.
Application Tab
Tapping in the View menu displays a drop-down menu where you can define restrictions for each storage area
of the Omnii. Restricted items are marked in the checkbox to the left in the sample screen above, soli-
taire.exe is restricted.
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab lists system features you can block from user access. Tapping in the checkbox to the left of
a feature adds a check mark indicating it is blocked.
Notifications
The Notifications tab allows you to choose which pop-up notifications are blocked from user view.
Control Panel Settings

This options allows you to tailor items displayed in both the Settings screen and in the Today screen.
the unit is reset. Refer to Activating a Change User Mode on page 4-87.
Hide Tab
The Hide tab under the Control Panel allows you to determine which applications will be hidden in the Settings
screen that is displayed when the operator taps on the Start button.
Settings 4 - 85
Remember that only unchecked items in this list are hidden.
Accessible Tab
The Accessible tab allows you to choose which items will be accessible in the Today screen.
Import and Export Settings

This option enables you to Export your settings file (.xml), and save it in the location of your choice. In addition,
an administrator has the option to Import these settings from one device to multiple devices of the same oper-
ating system.
IMPORTANT A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all Zebra .xml
files with a predefined name so that other Zebra utilities can locate it.
Tapping on the Export button displays an Export Settings screen. The default Name Kiosk_Settings can be
changed by the administrator even after it has been saved.
The .xml file contains all of the Kiosk configured settings, including the Administrator Password. When the file
is imported to a device, the new password is applied immediately.
Whether choosing to import or export files, the same file location options will be listed. Following the action,
a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file is displayed.
With the exception of the password, changes made to settings take effect only after a warm reset. If further
changes to the configuration are made, they will overwrite the changes caused by the import operation.
After importing a file, a dialog box appears requesting a reset now or later.
Settings 4 - 87
Activating a Change User Mode

To activate changes, youll need to switch from Administrator to User Mode. This Kiosk Access screen is
displayed automatically once youve finished making changes and have tapped on OK.
In the tab where youve made the changes, tap on OK. In the next screen the Kiosk menu screen tap
on OK.
A new screen, the Kiosk Access screen, is displayed.
Tap on Change to User mode.
Youll need to reset the Omnii so that the changes you specified can take effect.
Tap on Yes to reset the Omnii and activate your changes.
Regional Settings
To display the Regional Settings screen, tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on the System icon followed by
the Regional Settings icon.
Tap on the drop-down menu to choose your language and region.
Once youve selected a language and region, you may need to adjust the way numbers, currency, the time and
the date appear in your Omnii.
Tap on the tab associated with each of the items, and choose how each item should be displayed on
the unit.
Remove Programs
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on the System icon followed by the Remove Program icon.
Tapping on the Remove Programs icon displays a screen listing the programs that can be removed from
the unit.
To remove a program, highlight it and then tap on the Remove button.

Settings 4 - 89
Scanner Settings
IMPORTANT Refer to Appendix C: Scanner Settings for additional details.
The Scanners icon in the Settings menu provides access to dialog boxes in which you can tailor
barcode options.
Tap on Start>Settings, and then tap on System followed by the Scanners icon.
Restoring Default Settings

If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected
parameter, sub-tree of parameters, or all scanner parameters.
Press and hold the stylus on a symbology to display a pop up a menu.
Choose Default parameter to reset only the parameter you selected, or choose Default all settings to
reset all scanner parameters to default settings.
Options Tab
The Options tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options associated with
your scanner.
Double Click Parameters

Click Time (msec)
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first
and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range
is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature.
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data
parameter. When a value is not assigned for the Click Data, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the
target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for
the Click Data parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initi-
ating a scan.
Click Data
For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent to the application
installed in your Omnii following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want
to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Display Parameters
Scan Result
When this parameter is enabled, the type of barcode and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that
this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner button is
pressed. When the button is released, this information is cleared from the screen.
Scan Indicator
When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner
is activated.
Scan Result Time (msec)

The value assigned to the Scan Result Time (sec) parameter determines how long the scan results of a
successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of 0 (zero) disables
the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value.
NOTE To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired, point
the scanner away from the barcode and press the trigger.
Settings 4 - 91
Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep

These parameters determine whether or not the Omnii emits an audible scanner beep when a good
(successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed, the number of vibrates, the duration of the
vibrate, and so on. Set these parameters to tailor the behaviour of this parameter.
Multiple Beep Tones

This parameter determines whether or not multiple beeps will be allowed.
Good and Bad Scan Vibrates

These parameters determine whether or not the Omnii will vibrate (rather than beep) when a good (successful)
scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off
to disable it. You can further refine how you want the vibrations to behave, specifying the following: Number of
Vibrates, Duration of Vibrate (in milliseconds), and Pause between Vibrates (in milliseconds).
Soft Scan Timeout

This parameter is used by the SDK Scan function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the SDK function,
instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan
timeout from 1 to 10 sec. (default is 3 sec.).
Scan Log File

If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output barcode are logged in the file
\Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the Scan Log File is enabled, there is a slight performance effect
when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage.
Data Handling
This option allows you to choose the code page your Omnii will use to display data Default Local ASCII or
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1.
Codepage:
Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page your Omnii will use.
If you choose Default Local ASCII, the code page of the local OS is used. For example, if the local OS uses
double-byte Chinese characters, choosing this option will filter data through the local ASCII of that OS and
display it accurately, in this example, using double-byte characters.
If you choose ISO-8859-1 Latin 1, data will be displayed according to the character mapping of this Latin 1
code page, ignoring the local OS code page.
Translations Tab
The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order.
Only one case will be applied to a barcode and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are
successful if a rule within a case fails, the entire case fails.
In the Translations tab, double-tap on a Case # to create rules.
Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.
Settings 4 - 93
Case Rules
The case rules are defined as follows:
No rule ignored.
Match at index matches the match string at a specified index.
Match and replace at index matches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it.
Replace at index replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.
Add barcode prefix/suffix adds a global prefix or suffix.
Verify barcode size verifies the barcode size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before creat-
ing subsequent rules.
Search and replace replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.)
IMPORTANT Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into
account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the barcode size
is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the
size are applied.
The information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file (see Scan Log File on
page 4-91) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing.
Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6)

Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) are standard RS-232 DE-9 DTE ports on the Omnii port
replicator module, available on some snap modules and cradle types.
Enabled
This parameter must be set to on in order for Omnii to recognize the device connected to the Port Replicator
9-pin (COM5).
Power (COM6 only)

Pin 9 on Omnii COM6 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to OFF. This parameter must be set to on
to enable power to a Snap Module or Vehicle cradle.
Baud
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of
data transfer.
Figure 4-1 Port Baud Rates
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte. Most devices
use 8-bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7
or 8 data bits.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port.
Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1, 1.5 or 2 used for asynchronous communication.
Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence

If a SICK scanner connected to an Omnii port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on
and another to trigger the scanner off, the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow
you to define these serial streams.
Settings 4 - 95
Double-tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of
10 elements.
These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger
module you assigned. For example, suppose you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as
the module to trigger. Next, you assign a trigger key for this example, . (period). To define the serial
stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key, enter a hex value in the Trigger On
Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields. When you press the trigger key, the Trigger On Sequence is
sent and when you release the trigger key, the Trigger Off Sequence is sent, turning the trigger key on and off.
Screen
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the System icon, and then tap on the Screen icon.
This icon allows you to align (calibrate) your touchscreen, turn ClearType on and off and adjust the size of the
text displayed on the Omnii screen.
IMPORTANT Refer to Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 2-13.

Screen Rotation
Tap Start>Settings. Tap on the System icon, and then tap on the Screen Rotation icon.
This screen allows you to determine how your Omnii screen will behave depending on how the unit is rotated.
All orientations: screen rotates to portrait or landscape to match the orientation of the actual Omnii.
Portrait: screen only rotates between the two portrait orientations right side up and up side down.
Landscape: screen only rotates between the two landscape orientations left side up and left side down.
Enable auto screen rotation is enabled by default. If this option is disabled, you can determine screen orien-
tation manually.
Manual Screen Orientation

If you prefer to set screen rotation manually:
Disable the Enable auto screen rotation option.
A Configure button is displayed on the screen.
Tapping on the Configure button displays the Screen dialog box.

Settings 4 - 97
IMPORTANT Refer to Screen on page 4-95 for details about this screen.
System Properties
This program identifies the computer software and hardware components, indicating which components are
installed, their identification, version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled.
Tap on Start>Settings>System, and then tap on the System Properties icon.
Tapping on the Export button creates a log (SystemProperties.xml) of your current components, which is
placed in the My Devices folder in Windows Explorer.
Instead of expanding each section individually, you can also choose to open all the lists at once by tapping on
the Expand button, which will then change to a Collapse button to enable you to collapse all the sections as
well.
Task Manager
The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet provides a number of
options to manage these.
Tap on Start>Settings. Tap on System, and then the Task Manager icon the Task Manager screen
is opened.
End Task: To shut down an application, highlight the program in the list, and tap on the End Task
softkey in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
Task Manager Menu

The Task Manager menu provides additional options to help you manage your applications.
Tap on the Menu softkey at the bottom of the screen.
Switch To: Makes the highlighted application active.

End All Tasks: Shuts down all applications listed.
View: Allows you to list either all running applications or all processes.
Sort By: Allows you to sort active applications or processes based on Memory size, CPU or application or
process Name.
Refresh: Updates the list of applications or processes.
Exit: Closes the Task Manager.
Total Recall
Total Recall is a Zebra utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot, as well as
clone settings to other devices. This utility creates a restore point of a device at a known state. This can be
used as a backup of the device (the administrator can clean the terminal and restore the profile at any time), or
Settings 4 - 99
a clone (the administrator can store different configurations for different uses to clone to other hand-held
computers).
NOTE Total Recall works differently (e.g. restore on cold boot or on clean boot) on dif-
ferent OS platforms and versions (e.g. Windows CE 5.0, 6.0, Windows Mobile,
Windows Embedded Hand-held). For detailed information and other updates on
Total Recall information, please go to the Ingenuity Working website at:
www.ingenuityworking.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/total-recall.aspx
Tap on Start>Settings>System. Tap on the Total Recall icon.
In the start up screen, you can choose from four options: Create Backup, Create Clone, Manage Profile, and
Delete Profile.
Creating a Backup
Tap on the Create Backup button to begin the process.
This dialog box displays the Profile Name and the storage destination for the profile file.
In the Profile Name field, type a name for a profile.

If you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the [...] button to the right of
the Profile Location field and choose one of a number of folders.
IMPORTANT Any profile not stored in persistent memory (Flash Disk, external
USB drive) will be erased during a clean boot; therefore, you should
store profiles on a persistent drive.
IMPORTANT When performing an autorestore, the program only searches for the
profile located in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your
profile anywhere else it will not be restored. Only one profile can
reside in that folder.
- Tap on Start. A backup of the current settings will be created and saved to the specified location. The
unit will then reboot.
To view profiles and choose restore options, refer to Managing Profiles on page 4-101.
Creating a Clone
Cloning allows you to copy settings or configurations from one computer to another. There are two types of
clones to choose from: a Full Clone and a Settings Only Clone.
A Full Clone contains all files, most of the registry, and the settings files.
IMPORTANT The target device for a Full Clone MUST have the same model type
and OS build as the source, otherwise problems can occur. For
example, if the target device has a newer build of the OS, the new
build may have a different set of registry keys that may conflict with
the source.
A Settings Only Clone can be copied to a wider array of devices, but it should not be used as an
autorestore profile.
Tap on the Create Clone button to begin the process. Your Omnii model type and OS will be identified in
the cloning statement to ensure that you target devices of the same type.
Give the clone profile a name and location.
Tap on Next.
In the next screen, choose All for a Full Clone, or Selected Options for a Settings Only Clone. If you
choose Selected Options, a menu will open to enable you to decide which options you want cloned.
Settings 4 - 101
Managing Profiles
You can view profiles and choose profile options from the menus in this section.
Viewing a Profile
Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles. Highlight a profile, and then you can choose
to View the Profile Summary and go on to the next menu, Profile Details.
List of profiles Profile Summary Profile Details
Profile Options
Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles, as shown above. Highlight a profile, and tap
on the Next button to choose from options to restore or clone the profile. You can choose from four profile
options: Restore Now, Set for Autorestore, Upload to A.R.C., and Clone to USB.
Next, tap on the option button you want to use:

Restore Now restores the profile immediately. If you are restoring a profile that is a backup or Full Clone,
the computer will clean reset first; if the profile is a Settings Only Clone, it will not.
Set for AutoRestore creates a profile that is automatically restored following a cold reset or a clean
start. The profile is stored in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder.
IMPORTANT After setting an autorestore profile, that profile will overwrite any
other profile already placed in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder.
In an autorestore, Total Recall only restores the profile located in the

\Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your profile anywhere
else it will not be restored.
Upload to A.R.C uploads the profile to the Active Remote Configuration server. After you tap on Send,
a message will come up either confirming that the upload was complete or that the connection to the
server failed.
Clone to USB writes a clone of the profile to the USB drive. After you tap on the button, a message will
come up either confirming that the USB drive is ready for deployment, or that it is not available.
When you are ready to install the profile on another unit, turn on the next computer to be cloned and insert
the USB key. The profile will be automatically installed to the computers \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder.
There is a short delay in deployment so that you can cancel the process if needed.
Settings 4 - 103
USB drive prepared for cloning Autorun installation on next Omnii
Deleting a Profile
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Delete Profile.
Highlight the backup you want to delete, and tap on the [-->](Next) button.
A warning pop-up screen appears asking if youre certain that you want to delete this file.
Tap on the Yes to delete the file.
TweakIT
Tap on Start>Settings>System.
Tap on the TweakIT Settings icon.
This utility allows you to tweak or adjust system settings such as the interface, network and servers.
Advanced Interface and Network Settings
Enable IPv6
This option allows you to enable Internet Protocol, version 6, that has been published to use 128-bit IP address
(replacing version 4).
Settings 4 - 105
Modem Logging
When this option is enabled, the Omnii logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password string, etc.)
that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.
Advanced Services Settings
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server
The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Omnii time with that of the time server.
A warm reset must be performed once the server name has been entered.
Registry Editor
This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values.
Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the Omnii.
CHAPTER 5 ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES 5
Pistol Grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3

Removing the Trigger Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Attaching the Pistol Grip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Carrying and Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
The Hand Strap - Model ST6025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Power Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Important Charger Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Installation Chargers and Docking Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Charging the Omnii Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Charging the Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Docking station does not seem to power on.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Omnii charge indicator LED is red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Quad Docking Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Charging the Omnii Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Connecting to the Ethernet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cleaning the ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Power LED Does Not Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Insertion and Removal of Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Installation in High Voltage Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Extreme Wet Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Charge Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Charging Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Improper Battery Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Power Self-test LEDs Dont Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Accessories 5 - 3
Pistol Grips
There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of back cover and scanner/imager
installed in your hand-held. Refer to the table following for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the types of
back covers and scanners/imagers with which they are compatible.
Pistol Grip Description Model Number

Pistol Grip Standard Pod Kit ST6000
Pistol Grip Standard Back A Kit ST6100
Pistol Grip Standard Back B Kit ST6400
Pistol Grip Freezer Standard ST6500
Back Kit
Removing the Trigger Cover

Before installing the pistol grip, you need to remove the trigger cover.
Using a flathead screwdriver, gently and carefully pry the trigger cover off the hand-held.
Figure 5-1 Removing the Trigger Cover
Attaching the Pistol Grip
NOTE Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into
the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly.
The pistol grip is attached to the back of Omnii using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the Omnii
casing (see Figure 5-2 Attaching the Pistol Grip). Four M3x6 Phillips head screws are provided.
Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are
aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the hand-held.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws to a torque of 3 lbs-in (3kgf-cm) to secure the pistol grip
in place.
Figure 5-2 Attaching the Pistol Grip
Carrying and Protective Accessories

NOTE Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Zebra approved carrying case. Use
of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
There are several Omnii carrying and protective accessories to help you work safely and comfortably.
Attaching Carrying Accessories

If your Omnii is not fitted with a hand strap, you can install it using the carrying accessory kit supplied.
Youll need:
A Phillips head screwdriver.
IMPORTANT Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying

accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.
Accessory Model Number

Wrist Strap ST6040
Hand Strap ST6025
Soft Shell Holster ST6050
Hard Shell Holster ST6055
Forklift Holster ST6051
Carrying Case ST6090
Pouch ST6091
Accessories 5 - 5
Accessory Model Number

Screen Protector RV6105
Rubber Boot:
ST6080
Yellow Standard back covers A & B
ST6081
Grey Standard back covers A & B
ST6082
Yellow Expansion Back Covers
ST6083
Grey Expansion Back Covers
ST6084
Yellow Expansion Back Covers, WWAN
End-cap ST6085
ST6086
Grey Expansion Back Covers, WWAN
End-cap
Blue - Freezer Standard Back Covers
The Hand Strap - Model ST6025

Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the hand-held near the top of the unit
(see Figure 5-3 Attaching the hand strap), using the two Phillips head screws provided with this
accessory.
Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the hand-held, and hook the clip at the bottom of the handstrap
into the slot near the base of the battery pack.
Figure 5-3 Attaching the hand strap
Clip
Hand strap slot
Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090

A carrying case is available for Omnii to shield the unit from damage. It is compatible with the hand strap. A
variety of cases are available, depending on the type of end-cap attached to your unit.
Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055

A hard shell holster that includes a belt, leg tie-down, and tether, can be used to hang Omnii with a pistol grip
from your waist. Note that holsters are designed for both right- and left-handed use.
Feed the belt through the top panel of the holster, and adjust the belt as needed.
If using the leg tie-down strap, wrap it around your leg and snap the buckle closed. Adjust the tightness of
the strap for security and comfort.
Place Omnii into the holster with the grip extending back through the custom opening.
If desired, attach the tether to the pistol grip.
Figure 5-4 Hard Shell Holster (pistol grip tether not shown)
Power Accessories
The following accessories can be ordered for your Omnii:
Description Model Number

AC Wall Adaptor ST1050 or
ST1050-AR
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor ST3113
Snap Module Charger Only ST4000
Snap Module USB Host/Client plus Charger ST4001
Snap Module DE9M powered serial plus Charger ST4005
Snap Modules
NOTE The Snap Modules are shipped with their own quick start guide (Omnii Snap
Modules Quick Start Guide, PN 8000220). The guide should be reviewed for
additional information and updates.
Snap Modules are mobile power chargers for Omnii. They are compatible with the AC wall adaptor
(Model ST1050 or ST1050-AR) and the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor (Model ST3113).
Three types of Snap Modules are available:
Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): powers and charges the hand-held.
Model ST4001 (USB variant): powers and charges the hand-held. It provides communications via USB
1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors and provides a DC IN port. When attached to Omnii, it allows
ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center connectivity with your PC, and the use of a USB device
such as a USB memory key or supported peripheral.
Accessories 5 - 7
Model ST4005 (Serial variant): provides a powered DE9M serial connector. It powers and charges Omnii,
and provides serial communications to tethered devices. The DE9M connector is capable of speeds up to
115,200 bps. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to off. To enable power to this port, in your
Omnii desktop, go to Start>Settings>System>Scanners, which opens the Scanner Settings menus. In the
Ports menu, select on for the Power parameter under the COM6 port.
Figure 5-5 Snap Module Ports
ST4000 (Charger) ST4001 (USB) ST4005 (Serial)
No ports Micro-B port Type A (Host) USB port Powered DE9M Serial port
(5 VDC, 500 mA max) (9 pin, 5VDC, 1A max)
Back of Snap Modules

DC IN port (12V, 2.5 A)
Figure 5-6 Snap Module Installation
Side rail
Locking clip
Hand strap slot

DC IN port
To attach the Snap Module charger to Omnii:
Make sure that the charger connector and Omnii docking connector are free of dust or any other debris
before connecting them.
A slot in the side rail on each side of the hand-held accommodates the locking clips of the charger. To
attach the charger, align it with the base of the hand-held and gently slide up until the locking clips snap
into place (Refer to Figure 5-6 Snap Module Installation on page 5-7).
To remove the charger, press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the Omnii side rails
and slide the adaptor off.
Connect the charger to an AC or DC power source using the appropriate regional plug or cable. Then
connect the chargers DC plug into the Snap Modules DC jack. You can also attach an ST4001 or
ST4005 Snap Module to the Omnii and use the Omnii battery to power USB or serial peripherals, for
enhanced mobility.
NOTE If you are using a hand strap, there is no need to remove it before installing the
Snap Module, since the Omnii hand strap slot will still be accessible.
AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR

The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station or Snap Module allows you to operate your hand-held
using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.
The ST1050 is shipped with adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following regions: United Kingdom, Australia,
Europe and North America.
Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal
AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled together, are referred to as an AC wall
adaptor.
Insert the DC plug into the docking station or Snap Module jack.
Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.
Figure 5-7 ST1050 AC Wall Adaptor and plugs
Adaptor plugs
AC power supply
DC power plug
The ST1050-AR wall adapter is kitted with an AC plug that is suitable for use in Argentina.
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113

The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor allows you to power your hand-held and recharge your battery using power
drawn from your vehicles automotive power outlet when used in conjunction with a Snap Module.
Accessories 5 - 9
Figure 5-8 ST3113 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor
DC power plug
Adaptor plug
Attach a Snap Module to the base of the hand-held. Refer to Snap Modules on page 5-6 if you require
further details.
Insert the DC power plug on the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor into the DC IN port on the Snap Module.
Insert the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle.
NOTE Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.
Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information

Important Charger Safety Instructions
IMPORTANT Before charging a battery with a desktop docking station, it is critical

that you review the safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Com-
puter Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) and the Omnii
Hand-Held Accessories Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN
8000205).
Charging the Battery

Omnii Hand-Held Computer operates with lithium-ion battery pack Model ST3001. Preparing the unit for oper-
ation requires that the battery pack be charged and installed in the hand-held.
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs
must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking
stations. Currently the following are available:
The Snap Module is a mobile adaptor for Omnii. Three models are available see Snap Modules on
page 5-6.
The AC Wall Adaptor operates as an AC power source and also charges the battery installed in the unit
see AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR on page 5-8.
The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor powers Omnii and recharges the battery using power drawn from your
vehicles automotive power outlet see Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 on page 5-8.
The Desktop Docking Stations operate as both chargers and docking stations. Operating as a charger,
both the battery installed in Omnii and a spare battery can be charged. Priority is given to charging the
hand-held's battery. See Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 on page 5-10.
Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery
from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity.
% Charge Completed During Sleep Mode While Operating

100% 4 hrs. 8 hrs.
75% 2 hrs. 6 hrs.
IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge
process until the battery temperature is between 0C to 40C (32F
to 104F).
Installation Chargers and Docking Stations

When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines.
Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust, water and other liquids,
and contaminants.
Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). It
is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature between 18C
and 25C (64F to 77F) for maximum performance.
After unpacking your unit:
Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.

Install the IEC power cord (if applicable) and apply power.
Operator Controls
Omnii docking stations and chargers have no operator controls.
Power Consumption Considerations

Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for the load, espe-
cially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit.
Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003
NOTE Specialized versions of the desktop docking station are available for Argentina
and Korea. For Argentina, model number ST4002-AR is packaged with a wall
adaptor and a suitable, regional AR plug. For Korea, model number ST4002-KR
is packaged with a wall adaptor and a KR plug.
IMPORTANT The desktop docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide
(ST4002 and ST4003 Desktop Docking Stations Quick Start Guide,
PN 8000203). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional informa-
tion and updates.
Accessories 5 - 11
Omnii can be inserted into two desktop docking stations which are designed to charge the battery installed in
the hand-held along with a spare battery pack: Models ST4002 and ST4003.
IMPORTANT These docking stations can only be used to charge Zebra approved
lithium-ion batteries.
The ST4002 and ST4003 desktop docking stations feature:
Fast charging of the internal battery.

Fast charging of the spare battery pack.
A Host USB port to connect peripherals such as a printer, keyboard, etc.
A Client USB port to connect the docking station to a PC.
NOTE The ST4002 desktop dock can be upgraded to include the DE9M and RJ45
interfaces by using the ST4100 Xmod (Expansion Module).
The ST4003 desktop docking station additionally provides:
A DE9M serial port (unpowered) and an RJ45 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Both these interfaces are com-
patible with the USB to Ethernet/serial drivers included in Omnii (see Figure 5-10 Back of ST4003 Desktop
Docking Station on page 5-12).
Figure 5-9 Desktop Docking Station - Models ST4002 and ST4003
Omnii charge indicator

LED (far left)
(Indicates charge status of
internal Omnii battery.)
Release button
Omnii charging bay
Spare battery
Spare battery charging bay
Spare battery LED

(Indicates charge status of
a spare battery inserted
in the rear charging bay of
the docking station.)
The desktop docking station storage temperature is -30C to +60C (-22F to 140F). Operating temperature
and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0C to 40C (32F to 104F).
The desktop docking station uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensuring
the shortest possible charge time. See Battery Details on page 2-5 for more information regarding battery
capacity, charge times and battery life. See Charging the Battery on page 5-9 for spare battery
charge information.
Figure 5-10 Back of ST4003 Desktop Docking Station
Locking arm
Omnii
Connector pins
charging bay
Spare battery DC IN port

charging bay
RJ45 Ethernet port
Host USB port Client USB port

DE9M serial port
Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii

Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station. Plug the pronged end of the
cable into an AC outlet.
Slide the hand-held into the docking station, making certain that the hand-held is securely seated on the
docking station connector pins and engages the locking arms of the docking station. When the Omnii is
switched on, a message is displayed briefly on the screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the
station and the docking station icon is displayed in the taskbar.
The LED on Omnii lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin. It is safe
to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use the battery will not be overcharged.
Accessories 5 - 13
Indicators
The front-mounted LED on the desktop docking station indicates the spare battery charge status. The LED on
Omnii is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the
charge status of the battery can be detected easily.
Charge LED Behaviour Function

OFF No battery detected.
Solid Green Battery charging complete.
Flashing Green Charge in progress.
Flashing Yellow Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature
conditions.
Solid Red A charging timeout, unable to read battery, or non Zebra
battery.
Operation
Charging the Omnii Battery
The desktop docking station supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger.
When installed in the dock, the Omnii battery charge LED will illuminate to indicate the unit has external power
and can charge the internal battery. Omnii charge indication follows the same convention as the charger's
spare battery indicator (Figure 5-9 Desktop Docking Station - Models ST4002 and ST4003 on page 5-11).
NOTE Battery charging continues whether Omnii is switched on or off.
Charging the Spare Battery
IMPORTANT Do not store spare batteries in a charger for more than 72 hours.
Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity.
Install the battery in the battery charging bay (rear slot of the desktop docking station). Place the battery
contacts down to mate with the connector, and pivot the battery into place in the battery charging bay.
The desktop docking station spare battery LED lights up immediately. During charge the LED will be
flashing green.
When the battery has finished charging, the LED turns solid green.
The charge stops when the battery is fully charged and the LED remains green.
A full charge will take 3 to 4 hours for a 5000 mAh battery. This may take up to 8 hours if the hand-held is also
docked and charging.
Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the desktop docking station. Avoid
abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh
chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decom-
poses in strong alkaline solutions.
Troubleshooting
The indicators, applications, and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock (as
opposed to a charger) are installed on Omnii no applications are present on the docking station itself.
Docking station does not seem to power on.

When first connected to the DC power supply, the charger LED should flash a sequence of red, yellow, and
green.
If not, the charger is defective and requires service.
Omnii charge indicator LED stays off.

When Omnii is docked into a powered desktop docking station and the Omnii charge indicator LED stays off,
there could be a problem with the hand-held or with the docking station. Use a hand-held with a properly func-
tioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.
NOTE The desktop docking station charge LED only shows the status of the spare battery.
Omnii charge indicator LED is red.

If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the hand-held is docked:
Remove Omnii and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.

Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, the hand-held requires service.
Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed.

Try inserting a battery that is known to be working with another charger.
If the charge slot LED continues to show red with the known working battery, the charger is defective and
requires service.
Your Zebra battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity perfor-
mance. If the battery or charger are not Zebra approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the
spare charge slot LED or the Omnii LED will display red.
Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed.

Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken?).
Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot.
Try inserting a battery that you know to be working into the charger slot.
Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at
power-up.
If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and requires service.
Accessories 5 - 15
Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004
IMPORTANT The quad docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide
Omnii ST4004 Quad Docking Station Quick Start Guide (PN
8000222). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information
and updates.
IMPORTANT When ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320/IEC-60320

C13 power cord separately.
Figure 5-11 Front view
Charging bays (4)
Docking connectors (4)
Figure 5-12 Rear view
RJ45 Ethernet ports DC IN connector
The ST4004 Quad Docking Station is designed to accept up to four Omnii hand-held computers. The docking
station powers the units and their internal battery charger. The docking station also connects up to four of the
hand-held computers to a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer. An additional
Ethernet interface is available for connecting more docking stations downstream, up to 4 on the same network.
Operator Controls
The ST4004 has no operator controls or power switch.
Indicators
The quad docking station is equipped with Ethernet activity and link LEDs (see Figure 5-14 Ethernet network
connection on page 5-17).
Quad Docking Station Operation

Charging the Omnii Battery
Insert the DC power plug into the ST4004 rear DC IN connector (see Figure 5-14 Ethernet network
connection on page 5-17).
IMPORTANT Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Zebra, with the ground pin
connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified
electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.
The ST4004 supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger. Normally, a full charge of the battery
will take from 3 to 4 hours.
Insert up to four Omnii computers into the docking station charging bays, pressing down gently but firmly to
seat them securely.
During the charge, the Omnii LED slow flashes green.
When the battery finishes charging, the LED turns solid green.
To remove Omnii, push down on the release mechanism on the front face of the docking bay. The
hand-held will detach from the docking bay release arms and can be pulled up and out.
NOTE Battery charging continues whether Omnii is switched on or off.
Figure 5-13 Insertion and removal of Omnii computers
Release arm
Release mechanism
Installation
Place the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust, water and other liquids, and contaminants.
The ambient temperature must be in the range 0 C and 40 C (32 F to 104 F). The docking station will not
charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the
charger be operated at room temperature a temperature range between 18C to 25C (64F to 77F).
Accessories 5 - 17
Connecting to the Ethernet Network

Network Access
Omnii automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate
with the network. To connect more docking stations downstream (up to 4 on the same network), use the
Ethernet cable supplied with your quad docking station as the daisy chain cable (see Figure 5-15 Daisy chain
configuration on page 5-17).
Figure 5-14 Ethernet network connection
Left-side RJ45 port

(Ethernet connector to network)
Activity LED
(flashing green)
Right-side RJ45 port

(Ethernet connector to
other docks)
Link LED 10 or 100 Base-T

(solid amber) Ethernet connector
Figure 5-15 Daisy chain configuration
Maximum of four ST4004 Quad Docking Stations on one network cable
Ethernet network cable

Daisy chain cable
Daisy chain cable
Cleaning the ST4004
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the ST4004. Avoid abrasive cleaners,
solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is
partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
Troubleshooting
Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off
When Omnii is docked in a powered ST4004 and the hand-helds charge indicator LED stays off, there may be
a problem with Omnii or with the docking station. Make sure a battery is installed in the Omnii, otherwise use
an Omnii with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.
Power LED Does Not Light Up

Remove all Omnii units, and unplug the docking station.
Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.
Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.
Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.
Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow

A flashing yellow Omnii charge LED (the left-most LED on the hand-held) indicates that the battery is not within
the allowable charging temperature range 0 C and 40 C (32 F to 104 F). Allow the battery to come to an
acceptable range before reinserting Omnii in the docking station.
Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red

If the Omnii charge indicator is red when Omnii is in any of the four bays, the quad dock cannot read the
battery, is in charging timeout, or it is not a Zebra battery.
Remove the computers and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.

Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, Omnii requires service.
Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off

Check the AC cable. Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect.
If the adaptor LED stays OFF, the adaptor is defective and requires service.
Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002
IMPORTANT The vehicle cradles are shipped with their own quick start guide
Omnii Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide (PN 8000221). It is critical
that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.
The Omnii vehicle cradles are highly ruggedized, single station docks. Although they provide quick insertion
and removal, the cradles hold Omnii securely even when operated in high vibration environments (such as
vehicles not equipped with suspensions).
The Omnii vehicle cradle is available in two models:
Model ST1000 - Unpowered cradle.

Model ST1002 - Powered cradle with communications port. A DE9M serial port (powered) and two USB
Host interfaces.
Accessories 5 - 19
Figure 5-16 Front and back of ST1002 with Omnii
Mounting holes
Release button
Power/Communications port
Zebra also supplies a range of standard mounts for the hand-held vehicle cradles, and the Omnii vehicle
cradles are compatible with all of them.
Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
WARNING Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of

operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly
mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator
injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or
poor ease of egress for the operator. Zebra strongly recommends
that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle
manufacturer.
Ensure that you read the ST1002 Vehicle Cradle Installation Instruc-
tions document (PN 1020305), enclosed with the ST1002, for
important safety information on connecting fuses.
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful considera-

tion, especially for devices with loose cables. If you are unable to
obtain suitable advice, contact Zebra for assistance. Note also that
for better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the
vehicle roll cage.
Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access. In
addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles. Always
adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.
The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use brackets with the MT3324 (short arm) or MT3325
(standard arm) kit. The ST1002 requires either the MT3326 or MT3327 bracket; the ST1000 requires the
MT3328 bracket.
IMPORTANT It is strongly recommended that all fork lift mounting solutions use clamp
bases rather than plate bases that require penetrating through the vehicle
for installation.
Choose from one of the following clamp bases to secure the vehicle cradle/arm assembly to the vehicle:
MT3505
MT3507
Model Rail Width

MT3505 Clamp base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 2" max. width
MT3507 Clamp base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 3" max. width
MT3509 Rail base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 1-1/4" to 1-7/8"
MT3510 Rail base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 2" to 2 1/2"
Figure 5-17 Clamp and Rail Bases (Torque to 26 in-lbs)

Accessories 5 - 21
IMPORTANT Plate bases are not recommended for forklift mounting solutions. If a plate
rather than a clamp base is used, you will need to penetrate into the struc-
ture of the vehicle, a process requiring additional hardware. The following
plate bases are available:
VESA Plate MT3501
Circular Plate MT3502
Figure 5-18 MT3325 Standard Arm Kit with Omnii Vehicle Cradle
Omnii
MT3325 Arm
ST1002 Cradle
(powered)
MT3326 Bracket
To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the bottom of the cradle.
Leave a 7" (minimum) clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand-held. Refer to the
detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location (Omnii
Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide PN 8000221).
Insertion and Removal of Omnii

If your Omnii is equipped with a cover, or the ST6025 double loop hand strap, these accessories need to be
removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove other handstraps or pistol
grips from the unit.
Slide Omnii into the cradle, and press firmly downward until it locks into place. On a vehicle, its a good
idea to pull up on Omnii to be certain that it is secure.
To remove Omnii, press the release button on the front of the cradle until it releases.
Figure 5-19 Inserting Omnii into the vehicle cradle
Release
Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle

Two latches in the cradle hold Omnii firmly in place. Although these latches are designed for at least 100,000
insertion and removal cycles, they will wear over time and will no longer lock Omnii securely in the cradle. For
replacement parts and instructions contact Zebra. Partial disassembly is required.
ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation

The ST1002 cradle is designed to allow Omnii to be powered by a vehicle battery. The battery installed in
Omnii is also recharged by the vehicle battery. This option accepts DC power sources over the range 11.5V to
30V. Voltages above that require the use of the preregulator (Model No. PS1350).
WARNING Applying a voltage greater than that specified, or reversing polarity, may
result in permanent damage to the cradle power option and will void the
product warranty.
Operating an Omnii XT15f Arctic unit in operating temperatures from

-30C to +50C, requires the use of the power preregulator Model No.
PS1370.
The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44-pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle
Cradle Power and Communications Cable (DE9M serial port, 2 USB Host interfaces, and power cable) or the
power-only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable. For connector pinouts and a cable connections diagram, see
Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 on page A-5.
Accessories 5 - 23
Figure 5-20 Connecting to vehicle power
CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power CA3000 Vehicle Cradle

and Communications Cable Power Cable
For a diagram of a power with communications setup, see Figure 5-21 Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power
and communications in a typical setup on page 5-25.
The Omnii charging LED (see Battery Charge Status LED on page 2-15) indicates that external power is
available, and it also indicates the charging status of the internal battery.
Wiring Guidelines
Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, consider the following:
Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.
Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.
Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.
Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location, away from
areas where they may get snagged or pulled.
Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards.
Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere
with the operation of the vehicle.
Installation in High Voltage Vehicles
WARNING Voltages exceeding 30VDC are considered hazardous. Installation

of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 30VDC require
special consideration, as listed below.
Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle
power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator, and does not get exposed to water
or other liquids. Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a
hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death. Avoiding this hazard can be accomplished in the
following way.
Use the PS1350 pre-regulator or, for freezer applications (-30C), the PS1370 pre-regulator.
Ensure the power connector is wrapped securely with a waterproof electrical tape and installed in a dry
location on the vehicle, away from the vehicle operators reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a
sealed housing).
Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material (see Extreme Wet Environments for
additional details).
All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles
to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle.
Extreme Wet Environments

For extreme wet environments, or environments where it is difficult to restrict vehicle operator access to the
power connector, Zebra offers a waterproof heat shrink kit (PN 1030022). The kit contains 3 pieces of water-
proof, high shrink ratio heat shrink tubing which can be used to encapsulate the entire connector assembly. If
using this kit, please ensure that you order sufficient material to cover installation and service, remembering
that heat shrink is one-time use, and must be replaced if it is removed from the connector for any reason.
Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle

An optional 1.8 meter (6 foot) extension power cable (PN 13985-301 with motion detect or 13985-302) is avail-
able for your powered vehicle cradle. This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 4A) accessory
supply on the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 4A (less if the accessory supply is greater than
12V). Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A. Installation of the
19440-XXX fuse assembly using a 4A 250V fuse installed is mandatory, except when using a CA3002 vehicle
power cable. The 13985-XXX cables are not used with the CA3002. The 4A fuse is already included in the
CA3002 vehicle connector assembly.
NOTE When connecting PN 13985-301 (Screen Blanking version), ensure that the
screen blanking wires (clearly labelled) and the power wires (red/black leads)
are reliably secured away from each other, or are separated with reliably
secured certified insulation. A minimum 2.8mm distance, or 0.4mm distance
through insulation, is required for the separation.
The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black lead connects to the nega-
tive supply this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body.
You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch. It is preferable to wire the power
cradle after the key switch that is, it cannot be turned on without the key on. However, if the operator
switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle
before the switch.
Keep in mind that Omnii will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has suffi-
cient charge. If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440-300) must be added to
the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable). Use only a 4A fast blow UL
approved fuse in the fuse assembly (PN 9016622).
WARNING 11.530 Vdc input only, suitable for road vehicles. A pre-regulator is
required for use on forklifts. For such installations, Zebra recom-
mends using the PS1350 (15-90 VDC) pre-regulator or, for freezer
applications, the PS1370 pre-regulator.
Accessories 5 - 25
Figure 5-21 Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power and communications in a typical setup
Omnii
MT3325
Arm/Ball Kit
ST1002 MT3502 Circular Plate
MT3326
Mounting Bracket
CA3001 Cable
PS1350
Pre-regulator
OR
0
CA3002 Vehicle Power
35
PS
1 Outlet (CLA) Adaptor
USB and Serial access* r
we
ft po r
i
rkl we
Fo po
le
ehic
V
* Note: The serial port is 5 VDC, 1 A maximum power out and is defaulted to off.
To enable power to this port, in your Omnii desktop, go to Start>Settings>System>Scanners,
which opens the Scanner Settings menus. In the Ports menu, select ON for the Power parameter
under the COM6 port.
NOTE For the CA3002 Vehicle Power Outlet (CLA) Adaptor, replace with same fuse
type and rating.
Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006

The ST3006 is designed to charge up to six Omnii lithium-ion batteries at one time.
IMPORTANT The battery charger is shipped with its own quick start guide
ST3006 6-Slot Battery Charger Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204). It is
critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.
IMPORTANT When ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320/IEC-60320

C13 power cord separately.
Figure 5-22 ST3006 Battery Charger
TOP
Charging bay (6)
Charger indicator LEDs (4 per bay)
BOTTOM
Rubber feet (5)

DC IN connector
Drain holes (6) Bracket mounting holes (2)
Installation
The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit (MT2031) or it can be operated on a flat surface.
Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient temperature
must be in the range 5C to 39C (41F to 102F). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temper-
Accessories 5 - 27
ature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature
a temperature range between 18C to 25C (64F to 77F).
The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC, 3A at 240 VAC. Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying
the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are being powered from the same
circuit). After unpacking the unit:
Visually check the charger for damage.

Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
IMPORTANT Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Zebra, with the ground pin con-
nected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician
if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.
All charge indicators flash momentarily at power up to indicate that the charger is ready for operation.
If you choose to wall mount the charger, detailed installation instructions are included in the Omnii 6-Slot
Battery Charger ST3006 Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204) included with the charger kit. Be sure to locate the
charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity.
Operator Controls
The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch. There is no dedicated indicator light to
show that the charger is powered, but the charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power.
Charge Indicators
Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery. When the
Omnii batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charging
bays in use indicate the status of the charge.
Charge LED Behav- Function

iour
OFF No battery detected.
Solid Green Battery charging complete. Each LED represents 25% battery
capacity.
Flashing Green Charge in progress. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.
Flashing Yellow Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.
Solid Red Unable to read battery, charging timeout, or non Zebra battery.
Charging Batteries
Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between the guide rails
until it lightly latches in place.
The 4-LED bar for the battery bay shows 25% charger per LED. A flashing green LED shows charging is under
way. The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately. If the battery tempera-
ture is outside 0C to 40C (32F to 104F), the LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully
discharged battery will normally take 4.5 hours to charge. At full capacity, it turns solid green.
When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be overcharged if left in
the charger slot.
Troubleshooting
Improper Battery Storage
Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods (more than a week or two) is not recommended.
Lithium-ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for long periods of time. See the battery
handling recommendations in The Battery on page 1-5.
Power Self-test LEDs Dont Light Up

The charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power indicating the self-test mode. When
applying power to the unit, all the LEDs will light up. Yellow will show up in the 25% LED for each bay; green for
other LEDs. Then bay #1 will blink a binary representation of the firmware version (V09 = 1001). If the self-test
is not evident:
Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.

Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.
Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.
Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.
Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed

Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot.
Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot.
Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).
Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.
Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at power up.
APPENDIX A PORT PINOUTS
APPENDICES
APort Pinouts
Omnii Docking Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Snap Modules Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Omnii Battery Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Port Pinouts A-3
Omnii Docking Connector

The docking interface on the base of Omnii is custom-designed to dock with a device via an array of
spring-mounted pins.
The following are the pin assignments of the interface.
Pin # Signal Pin # Signal

1 GROUND 11 USB_OTG_P
2 DC_IN 12 USB_OTG_M
3 DOCK_LOW_PWR 13 CHARGE_IN
4 GROUND 14 GROUND
5 USB_OTG_VBUS 15 DC_IN
6 CHARGE_IN 16 UART_RX
7 GROUND 17 GROUND
8 DC_IN 18 UART_TX
9 USBH_P 19 CHARGE_DATA
10 USBH_M 20 GROUND
A-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Snap Modules Connectors

Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): power and charge.
Model ST4001 (USB Host/Client variant): power, charge, communications via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and USB
2.0 Client connectors, DC IN port.
Model ST4005 (DE9M Serial variant): powered DE9M serial connector, power, charge, serial communica-
tions. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V 1A max power out and is defaulted to off.
ST4001 ST4005
USB Micro B connector USB Type A connector Powered DE9M serial port
(USB device/ActiveSync) (USB host)
The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces.
ST4001 ST4005
USB Micro B Connector USB Type A Connector DE9M Serial Connector
Pin # Signal Pin # Signal Pin # Signal
1 VBus 1 VBus 1 DCD
2 D- 2 D- 2 RXD
3 D+ 3 D+ 3 TXD
4 ID 4 GROUND 4 DTR
5 GROUND 5 SHIELD 5 GROUND
6 SHIELD 6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 5Vdc 1A power
out
Port Pinouts A-5
Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002

The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44-pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle
Cradle Power and Communications Cable (DE9M serial port, 2 USB Host interfaces, and power cable) or
the power-only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable. For installation details, see ST1002 Powered Cradle
Installation on page 5-22.
ST1002 Vehicle Cradle
44-pin connector
CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and

Communications Cable
DE9M serial port
Power connector
USB Type A connectors

(USB host)
The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces.
DE9M Serial USB Type A Power

1 DCD 1 VBus 1 VIN (11.5 to 30Vdc)
2 RXD 2 D- 2 GND (not chassis
ground)
3 TXD 3 D+ 3 MOTION DETECT
4 DTR 4 DGROUN 4 MOTION DETECT
D RETURN (not ground)
5 GROUND
6 DSR
7 RTS
A-6 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
DE9M Serial USB Type A Power

8 CTS
9 5Vdc 1A power out
Omnii Battery Contacts

Figure A-1 Battery Contact Pinout
765432 1
Pin # Signal Name Description

1 BATT+ Positive lead of battery.
- Plastic Rip - provides mechanical polarity.
2 BATT+ Positive lead of battery.
3 BATT-CLK SMBus data clock.
4 BATT-ID Connected to GND in the battery.
5 BATT-DATA SMBus bi-directional data line.
6 GND Negative lead of battery.
7 GND Negative lead of battery.
APPENDIX B IMAGERS APPLET
BImagers Applet
The Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Required Applets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Barcode Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Image Capture Predefined Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Using the Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Configuring the Image Capture Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Filter Tab Manipulating Barcode Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
B-2 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Modifying a Barcode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

Translation Tab Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
File Locations for Captured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Configuring Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
Imager Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
Color Camera Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Imagers Applet B-3
The Imagers Applet

The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete and activate imager settings. The principle uses of the
applet are to decode barcodes and to capture images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate
how the imager works. Refer to Imager and Camera Demo on page 3-31 for details.
Required Applets
In order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers applet must be present in the Settings>System tab along
with the Imagers applet.
Presets
There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Imagers applet:
Use a predefined preset.

Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset.
IMPORTANT It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever

possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings
that are known to work together in the intended environment. In almost
all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satis-
factory outcome.
A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a specific
purpose such as barcode decoding or image capture.
Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or resume from suspend.
The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom preset can be created for a
specific user application, such as: include only specified barcodes, read only a specified number of barcodes
or for reading unusual media.
Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:
Imaging for photo capture.

Imaging for barcode decoding.
Symbology selection.
At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected active preset.
Predefined Presets
Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow
you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous variables. In
almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient.
Barcode Predefined Presets

These presets encompass the majority of the most popular barcodes and their subtypes. The barcode
decoding symbology predefined presets define which barcodes can be decoded. The barcode decoding
camera predefined presets determine how the barcode images are captured
Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets

The following presets select groups of similar barcodes for decoding.
NOTE It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Factory Default
This preset enables the decoding of frequently used barcodes.
My Default
The barcodes in this preset can be enabled, disabled and so on.
All
This preset enables the decoding of all barcodes that the imager can decode. For a list of these symbologies
see Imager Barcode Symbologies on page B-20 and Color Camera Barcode Symbologies on page B-21.
Linear
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode. For a list of these
symbologies see Imager Barcode Symbologies on page B-20 and Color Camera Barcode Symbologies on
page B-21
Linear and PDF417

This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode. For a list of
these symbologies see Imager Barcode Symbologies on page B-20 and Color Camera Barcode Symbolo-
gies on page B-21
Matrix
This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode. See Imager Barcode
Symbologies on page B-20 and Color Camera Barcode Symbologies on page B-21 for a list of
these symbologies.
Postal
This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode. See Imager
Barcode Symbologies on page B-20 and Color Camera Barcode Symbologies on page B-21 for a list of
these symbologies.
Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets

The following presets enable successful barcode image capture in almost all conditions.
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux).
Low light
This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low, or
inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain.
Imagers Applet B-5
Low power
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the Omnii.
Glossy surface
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to read barcodes that
are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.
Image Capture Predefined Presets

The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions.
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux).
Motion
This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion.
Low light near

This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash.
Using the Imagers Applet

Configuring the Image Capture Presets
To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:

Tap on the Imagers icon, and if its not already selected, tap on the Imaging tab.
The following screen is displayed:
Figure B-1 Imaging Tab

This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified as follows:
Predefined presets are marked as read-only.

Custom presets are marked as read and write.
One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active.
Selecting a Camera
Your Omnii has a built-in imager and a camera. One camera must be selected for configuration. To select a
camera:
Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera either Imager, the imager located at the top of the unit, or Colour Camera, the camera
located at back of the Omnii.
Setting the Active Preset

An active preset has an A to the right. To set an active preset:
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
Highlight a preset, and tap on the View button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Creating a Custom Preset

A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an existing custom
preset. To create a custom preset:
Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button.
In this example, the Low light near preset was chosen. A screen like the sample below is displayed.
Imagers Applet B-7
Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.

The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read
and write.
Modifying a Custom Preset

The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made
to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original prede-
fined preset. To change a parameter value:
Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the Edit button.

Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting
like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either
method toggles between the two available values.
When youve completed your edits, tap on OK.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
Removing a Custom Preset

Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.
Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets

To configure the barcode decoding camera presets:

Tap on the Imagers icon, and scroll to the Barcoding tab.
Imagers Applet B-9
Figure B-2 Barcode Presets
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as follows:
Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review Predefined Presets on page B-3.
Custom presets are marked as read and write.
One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active.
NOTE The top portion of the window displays the barcode decoding presets.
Selecting a Camera
One camera must be selected for configuration. To select a camera:
Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options.
Choose a camera either Imager, the imager located at the top of the unit, or Color Camera, the camera
located at back of the Omnii.
IMPORTANT Currently, only the Imager can be used to read barcodes. The
Color Camera is limited to taking photos.

An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B-2 Barcode Presets on page B-9 on at the beginning of this
section, the active preset is Default. To set an active preset:
Viewing a Preset

B - 10 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

A screen like the sample following is displayed.

and write.
Imagers Applet B - 11

Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
is displayed.


Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies

To configure the barcode decoding presets:
Tap on Start>Settings>System>Imagers icon.

Tap on the Barcoding tab.
Scroll down to view your barcode options.
Figure B-3

An active preset has an A to the right; in the Figure B.3 above, the active preset is My Default. To set an
active preset:
Viewing a Preset

Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

A screen like the sample following is displayed.

and write.

is displayed.


Filter Tab Manipulating Barcode Data

To configure rules for manipulating barcode data:
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.

Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Filter tab.
Modifying a Barcode Setting

The rules for manipulating data from selected barcode symbologies can be modified. To change the settings
for a symbology:
is displayed.
For a parameter that takes a single character:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. The following
screen is displayed:
Translation Tab Configuring Rules

Translation rules enable the automatic processing of barcode data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each
consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.
Tap on Start>Settings>System tab.

Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translation tab.
In the Translations tab, double-tap on a Case # to create rules.

Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.
Case Rules
The case rules are defined as follows:
No rule ignored.
Match at index matches the match string at a specified index.
Match and replace at index matches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it.
Replace at index replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.

Add barcode prefix/suffix adds a global prefix or suffix.
Verify barcode size verifies the barcode size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before creat-
ing subsequent rules.
Search and replace replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.)
IMPORTANT Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into
account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the barcode size
is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the
size are applied.
Advanced Tab
File Locations for Captured Images
To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:
Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.
To define the location where imager files will be stored:
Tap on the File Location button.
Type the file Name, choose the Folder and file Type.
Choose the Location in which your files will be saved.
When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button.
Configuring Triggers
Viewing The Trigger Configuration
The trigger on the Omnii hand-held is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Imagers applet
provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet.
In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button.

To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in the checkbox next
to Show all modules.
Adding, Editing and Removing Triggers

For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to Manage Triggers on page 4-72.
Barcode Symbologies
There are two sets of barcode symbologies, one for Imager and one for Color Camera. To display the barcodes
available:
In the PTS Imager Settings screen, scroll to the Barcoding tab.

In the Camera Presets: drop-down menu at the top of the PTS Imager Settings screen, choose Imager or
Color Camera depending on which set of barcodes you want to work with.
Scroll down to the Barcode Presets.

Tap on an Barcode Preset to display the barcode symbologies.
Imager Barcode Symbologies

The barcode symbologies for the Imager are listed in this section.

All 1D With Strong Recovery
Enabled
Code 39
Code 128
EAN 13
EAN 8
UPC-E
UPC-A
UPC/EAN Sharing Settings
Code 93 (disabled)

MSI Plessey (disabled)
Code 11 (disabled)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)
Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled)
Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled)
Telepen (disabled)
Gs1 DataBar (disabled)
TLC-39 (disabled)
2D PDF-417
2D micro PDF-417
CodaBlock F (disabled)
CodaBlock A (disabled)
2D Data Matrix
2D QR Code
2D Maxicode (disabled)
2D Aztec (disabled)
Postal: PlanNET (disabled)
Postal: PostNET (disabled)
Postal: China (disabled)
Postal: Japanese (disabled)
Postal: Kix (disabled)
Postal: Royal (disabled)
Gs1
Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

The barcode symbologies for the Color Camera are listed in this section.
Color Camera Barcode Symbolo-

gies
All 1D With Strong Recovery
Enabled
Code 39
Code 128
EAN 13
EAN 8
UPC-E
Color Camera Barcode Symbolo-

gies
UPC-A
Code 93 (disabled)
Codabar
Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)
Gs1 DataBar (disabled)
Gs1 Composite
2D PDF-417
2D micro PDF-417
2D Data Matrix
2D QR Code
2D Maxicode (disabled)
2D Aztec (disabled)
Postal: PlanNET (disabled)
Postal: PostNET (disabled)
Postal: Australia (disabled)
Postal: Canadian (disabled)
Postal: Japanese (disabled)
Postal: Kix (disabled)
Postal: Korean (disabled)
Postal: Royal (disabled)
APPENDIX C SCANNER SETTINGS
CScanner Settings
Barcode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Decoded (Internal) Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Decoded (Internal) Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Decoded (HHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Decoded (Intermec ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Decoded (ISCP) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Non-Decoded Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Scanner Settings C-3
Barcode Settings
The Scanners icon provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner configurations and choose
the barcodes your scanner will recognize.
Tap on Start>Settings> System>Scanners icon.
The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit.
IMPORTANT To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN]
key and the [ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of
three seconds.
For information on configuring the Options, Translations, and Ports

settings, see Omnii.
Scanner Options
The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the
following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held: Decoded (internal), Decoded
(HHP), Decoded (Intermec ISCP), and Non-decoded Scanners.
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports. Always
defer to your barcode scanners programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for
any parameter.
NOTE Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. To
determine the type of scanner installed in your unit, go to
Start>Setting>System>System Properties icon.
C-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
IMPORTANT To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to on)
only those codes that are required by the application.
Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All
internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.
Restoring Default Settings

If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected
parameter, sub-tree of parameters, or all scanner parameters.
Press and hold the stylus on a symbology to display a pop up a menu.
Choose Default parameter to reset only the parameter you selected, or choose Default all settings to
reset all scanner parameters to default settings.
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (internal).
Options
NOTE Some options are available only for specific scanners. Refer to the option
names in this section for scanner model identification.
Dot Time (msec)

The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on
before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is
displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec, 200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the
target dot.
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or
trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99. The
value is measured in tenths of seconds.
Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options

Scan Mode
You can set the method of scanning by setting this parameter to Scan beam only, Aim with Scan: 1 trigger pull,
Aim with Scan: 2 trigger pulls, Aim with Scan on trigger release, and Continuous Scan Mode. Default is Scan
beam only.
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins
sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value
from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming-dot.
Minimum Cancel Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the
scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current
decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off.
Power Mode
This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options:
Continuous Power and Low Power.
In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or serial communication.
In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a standby state, drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial
communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications,
there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a barcode.
Low Power Timeout

To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The
scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanned a successful decode restores normal
flashing.
This is only used if the units Trigger Mode has been changed to Continuous On. If the unit is used in a fixed
mount this parameter might be used, but not if the unit is used as a hand-held.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec.,
1 min., 2 min. or 3 min.
NOTE This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On
and Omnii is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, Low Power Timeout is
not used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter barcodes.
Linear Security Level

This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your barcode quality. There are four
levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should
be selected for decreasing levels of barcode quality. As security levels increase, the scanners decode
speed decreases.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4.
Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before
being decoded:
Code Type Length

Codabar All
MSI Plessey 4 or less
D 5 of 5 8 or less
I 2 of 5 8 or less
Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded.
Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before
being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Code Type Length

MSI Plessey 4 or less
D 2 of 5 8 or less
I 2 of 5 8 or less
Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded.
Bi-Direction Redundancy
NOTE This parameter is only valid if a Linear Security Level is enabled.
When this parameter is enabled, a barcode must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and
reverse) before being decoded.
Decoded (Internal) Data Options

Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned barcode type. In addition to any single character prefix already
selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code:
None, AIM or Symbol.
Scan Data Format

This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format.
Double-tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format:
data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2] and [P] data [S1][S2].
Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] and Suffix [S2]

A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing. When you double-tap
on these parameters, dialog boxes are displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255.
Delete Char Set ECIs

Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set
ECIs (Extended Channel Interpretations [also known as GLIs]) from its buffer before transmission.
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 barcodes
containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.
ECI Decoder
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs)
supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs.
If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned, the scanner
transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data.
The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in the table following.
Decoded (Internal) Barcode Symbologies

Code 39 UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Trioptic Code (disabled) Code 93 (disabled)
Code 128 Codabar (disabled)
EAN 13 MSI Plessey (disabled)
EAN 8 Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)
UPC-A Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled)
UPC-E Gs1 DataBar (disabled)
Decoded (HHP)
To configure imagers, please see Appendix B: Imagers Applet.
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP).
Decoded (ISCP) Options

Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or
trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10
seconds.
Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options

Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is
pressed and held down.
Minimum Cancel Time

The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the
scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current
decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off.
Low Power Timeout

To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The
scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanned a successful decode restores normal
flashing.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec,
1 min, 2 min, or 3 min.
NOTE This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous
On and the unit is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, Low Power Timeout
is not used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter barcodes.
Same Read Validate

The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at this parameter
determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times.
Same Read Timeout

Prevents the same barcode from being read more than once. The value assigned determines after what time
period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
Diff Read Timeout

Prevents unwanted reading of other barcodes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what
time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.
Add AIM ID Prefix

The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international barcode identifier. When
this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of the decoded barcode.
The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in table following.
Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Barcode Symbologies

Code 39 TLC-39 (disabled)
Code 128 2D PDF-417
EAN 13 2D micro PDF-417
EAN 8 Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled)
UPC-A Telepen (disabled)
UPC-E Gs1 DataBar (disabled)
UPC/EAN Shared Settings Composite
Code 93 (disabled) TLC-39 (disabled)
Codabar (disabled) PDF-417
MSI Plessey (disabled) micro PDF-417 (disabled)
Code 11 (disabled) CodaBlock F (disabled)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) CodaBlock A (disabled)
Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled)
Non-Decoded Scanners
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Non-decoded.
All the available barcode symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in this tab.
A plus sign (+) to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub-menu of parameters is attached.
Tap on the + sign to display the sub-menu.

To change a parameter value, double-tap on the parameter. If you need to type a value, a dialog box is dis-
played in which you can type a new value. If you need to change a yes or no value, double-tapping on the
parameter toggles between yes and no.
If youre using the keyboard:
Highlight the barcode you want to work with, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-menu.
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to highlight a parameter.
To change a parameter value, press [SPACE] or the [RIGHT] arrow key. If a field requires text entry, a text
box is displayed in which you can enter the appropriate value.
Options
Tap on the + sign next to Options to display these parameters.
Dot Time (msec)

The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on
before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is
displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 3000. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.
C - 10 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Short Code
When enabled, this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 barcodes (2 characters). When disabled, these
short barcodes are rejected.
Enabling Short Code may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the hand-held must decode more
potential barcodes; it is therefore not recommended for general-purpose barcodes with 4 or more characters.
Verify
The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the
initial decode, prior to a barcode being accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to
decode a barcode but also improve the reliability of the decoded barcode.
Security
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge barcodes (Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN).
Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the
barcode. The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting.
The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in table following.
Non-Decoded Barcode Symbologies

Code 39 Code 93 (disabled)
Code 128 Code 11 (disabled)
EAN 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)
EAN 8 MSI Plessey (disabled)
UPC-A Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled)
UPC-E IATA 2 of 5 (disabled)
Codabar (disabled)
APPENDIX D INTERNAL IMAGER &
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
DInternal Imager & Scanner Specifications
Internal Scanners and Imagers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

SE955 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
SE955 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
SE965 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
SE965 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
SE1224HP Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
SE1524ER Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
EV15 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
EA11 Typical Reading Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-10
EA20X Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-10
EA20X Typical Reading Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
HHP 5080SR Imager/Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-12
HHP 5080SR Working Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-12
SE4500SR Standard Range Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-13
SE4500SR Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-15
SE4600LR Long Range Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-16
SE4600LR Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-18
Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D-3
Internal Scanners and Imagers

This appendix lists specifications for the following internal scanners and imagers. For a current list of model
numbers and descriptions for Omnii scanner pod and back cover kits, please contact your Zebra representa-
tive or go to:
http://www.zebra.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Psion/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_p_handheld.
SE955 Scanner
Parameter SE955
Configuration Decoded
Scan Rate 104 ( 12) scans/sec (bidirectional)
Scan Angle 47 3 default / 35 3 reduced
Voltage 3.0-3.6 V 10%;
5 V 10%
Ambient Light: 10,000 ft. candles
Laser Safety IEC 60825
Electrical Safety UL 60950, EN/IEC 60950
EMI/RFI FCC Part 15 Class B, EN 55024/CISPR 22,
AS 3548, VCCI
Environmental RoHS Compliant
SE955 Decode Zones

D-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
SE965 Scanner
SE965
Dimensions 0.46 in. H x 0.85 in. W x 0.61 in. D
11.75 mm H x 21.6 mm W x 15.5 mm D

Weight 0.27 oz./7.6 g
Configuration Decoded
Interface SSI Control over TTL Serial on a 12-pin ZIF connector
Scan Angle Wide (default): 47 (typical)
Medium: 35 (typical)
Narrow: 10 (typical)
Note: The SE965 scan engine does not require margin on

either side of the barcode to decode. The 47 scan line
provides identical scanning performance to older scan
engines with a scan line of 53.
Skew Tolerance 40 from normal
Pitch Tolerance 65 from normal
Roll Tolerance 35 from vertical
Specular Dead Zone 8
Optical Resolution 0.005 in. minimum element width
Scan Repetition Rate 104 ( 12) scans/sec (bidirectional)
Print Contrast Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm
Ambient Lighting Toler- Tolerant to typical artificial indoor and natural outdoor (direct
ance sunlight) lighting conditions. Fluorescent, Incandescent,
Mercury Vapor, Sodium Vapor, LED5. 450 Ft Candles (4,844
Lux) Sunlight 8000 Ft Candles (86,111 Lux)
Operating Temperature -22 F to 140 F/ -30 C to 60 C
Storage Temperature -40 F to 158 F/ -40 C to 70 C
SE965 Decode Zones

SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner
Parameter SE1224HP
Type Laser Class 2
Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm
Scan Rate 35 ( 5) scans/sec (bi-directional)
Scan Angle/Field of View 42 (typical), 30 (narrow)
Scan Patterns Linear
Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm.
Symbologies UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, RSS, Code 39,
Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.
Programmable Parameters Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode,
Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths,
Data formatting.
Ambient Light Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4844 Lux).
Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles (86112 Lux).

Laser Output Power (peak) 1.35 mW
SE1224HP Decode Zones

SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner
Parameter Specification
Type Laser Class 2
Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm
Scan Rate 35 ( 5) scans/sec (bi-directional).
Scan Angle/Field of View13.5 0.7
Scan Patterns Linear
Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm.
Symbologies UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC.EAN128, RSS, Code 39, Code
93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.
Programmable Parameters Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode,
Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data
formatting.
Ambient Light Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux)
Sunlight: 4,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux).

Laser Output Power (peak) 1.26 mW
SE1524ER Decode Zones

SE1524ER Decode Zone A (Short Range, Small Codes)
SE1524ER Decode Zone B (Long Range, Large Codes)
EV15 Imager
Light Source 617 nm highly visible LED
Scan Angle 40
Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25%
Minimum X. Dimension 0.1 mm (4 mils)
Reading Distance Up to 90 cm (35 in)
Symbologies UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128,
ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of
5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen,
PDF417, Micro PDF417
Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux
EV15 Imager Decode Zone
0 Lux to 100,000 Lux

Minimum Range Maximum Range
Mil Size Inches Inches
5 2.5 7
10 3 14
UPC 2 14.5
20 2.5 22
40 3 35.5
High quality symbols in normal room light.
EA11 Decoded 2D Imager
Scan Rate 2D mode: 56 images/s auto adaptive
Linear Emulation Mode 200 scans/s auto adaptive
Scan Angle 38.9 (horizontal), 25.4 (vertical)
Optical Resolution 752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels
Print Contrast down to 25%
Versions Standard range and high density
Symbologies - 1D EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional),
RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Inter-
leaved/Matrix/ Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code
93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian
Post, BPO, Canada Post, Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet,
Sweden Post)
Symbologies - 2D
Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR,
Aztec GS1 composite codes
Voltage (optics) 3.3V -5% / +10% (typical values)
Operating Current 170mA - 310mA (lighting condition dependent)
Power Saving Mode 2mA
Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux
Regulatory Approvals UL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant
D - 10 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
EA11 Typical Reading Distances
EA20X Imager
Light Source 617nm highly visible LED, 650nm laser framing/aiming
Scan Rate 2D mode: 60 images/s auto adaptive
Linear Emulation 200 scans/s auto adaptive
Mode
Scan Angle 26.0 (horizontal), 16.8 (vertical)
Framing Angles 25.0 (horizontal), 16.0 (vertical)
Optical Resolution 752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels
Print Contrast down to 30% on 1D, 35% on 2D
Minimum Resolution 1D symbologies 0.15 mm (6 mil), Stacked (PDF417) 0.17 (6.6 mil) and
2D matrix 0.18 (7mil)
Symbologies - 1D EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS,
Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/
Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI,
Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post, BPO, Canada Post,
Symbologies - 2D Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post)
Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR,

Aztec GS1 composite codes
Voltage 3.3V 5%
Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D - 11
Operating Current 410mA @ 3.3V scanning with power save
Power Saving Mode 7mA
Ambient Light From 0 to 100,000 lux
Regulatory Approvals UL, cUL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant, Class 2 Laser
EA20X Typical Reading Distances

HHP 5080SR Imager/Decoder

Focal Point - SR 7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate
Image Sensor 752 x 480 CMOS sensor
Motion Tolerance 4 inches per second
Rotational Sensitivity 360
Viewing Angle 40
Ambient Light Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)
Illumination LEDs 626 nm 30 nm
Aiming LEDs: 526 nm 30 nm
Laser: 650 nm 10 nm
Input Voltage - Imager 3.3 VDC 5% (23C)
Input Voltage - HHP 5080 3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23C)

Current Draw - Imager Max. Operating Current: 100 mA; Standby Current: 100
A
Current Draw - HHP 5080
Average Current (Interlaced Mode): 510 mA;
Standby Current: 120 A; Peak: 600 mA
Symbologies:
2 Dimensional PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR
Code, Aztec, Aztec Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite
Linear Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2 of

5, Reduced Space Symbology, Code 93, Codablock
Postal Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post,

Japanese Post, KIX (Netherlands) Post
HHP 5080SR Working Range

Data is characterized at 23C (73.4F) and 0 lux ambient light.
Symbology Size (mil) Near Far

Linear 8.3 (.020cm) 3.5 in. (8.9cm) 7.6 in. (19.3cm)
PDF417 10 (.025cm) 3.1 in. (7.9cm) 9 in. (22.9cm)
UPC 13 (.033cm) 2.1 in. (5.3cm) 13.2 in. (33.5cm)
Data Matrix 15 (.038cm) 2.3 in. (5.8cm) 10.2 in. (25.9cm)
QR 15 (.038cm) 3.1 in. (7.9cm) 8.8 in. (22.4cm)
MaxiCode 35 (.089cm) 2.0 in. (5.1cm) 13.0 in. (33cm)
SE4500SR Standard Range Imager

Power Requirements - 3.3 V 0.3 V at 23 C
Input Voltage
Operating Mode Supply Currents (conditions VCC=VCC_SENSOR=VCC_ILLUM = 3.3VDC)
(at 23 C):
Low Power 500 A
Idle 18 mA
Image Acquisition 80 mA
Illumination Enabled 200 mA
Maximum Operating 250 mA (aiming on during exposure, illumination enabled)
Current
Maximum Sensor Power 100 mVp-p (3.3 V, 10 Hz - 100 kHz) for decoding
Supply Noise* (at 23 C)
30 mVp-p (3.3 V, 10 Hz - 100 kHz) for image capture
Optical Resolution SR focus: 5.0 mil (Code 39), 6.7 mil (PDF417)
*For better image quality in image capture applications, use an additional filter on
VCC_SENSOR. For additional
performance improvement, provide a separately regulated 3.3 V supply for the sensor.
Specular Dead Zone:
Illumination On Up to 20 depending on target distance and substrate glossiness
Illumination Off None
Skew Tolerance 60
Pitch Angle 60
Roll 360
Ambient Light Immunity 9000 ft. candles (96,900 lux)
(Sunlight)
Imaging Sensor:
Image Resolution 752 H x 480 V pixels (Wide VGA)
Grey Scale 256 levels (8 bits per pixel)
Field of View (FOV) SE4500-SR: 39.6 horizontal, 25.7 vertical
Focusing Distance from 8 in. / 20.3 cm
Front of Engine (SR)
Aiming Element:
Visible Laser Diode (VLD) 655 10 nm
Central Dot Optical Power 0.6 mW (typical)
Pattern Angle 40 horizontal, 30 vertical
Illumination System:
LEDs 625 5 nm (dominant wavelength)
Pattern Angle 60 x 40 at 80% center intensity
Shock 2000 G 5% applied via any mounting surface at -30 and 55 C
for a period of 0.85 0.05 msec
2500 G 5% applied via any mounting surface at 23 C for a

period of
0.85 0.05 msec

Vibration Unpowered SE4500 withstands a random vibration along each of
the X,
Y, and Z axes for a period of one hour per axis (6 G rms), defined
as follows:
20 to 80 Hz Ramp up at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave

80 to 350 Hz 0.04 G2/Hz
350 Hz to 2 kHzRamp down at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave
ESD 2 kV @ connector
Laser Safety Class CDRH / IEC Class 2
LED Class IEC Class 1M
Maximum Engine Dimen- 11.8 mm H x 21.50 mm W x 16.3 mm D
sions
0.46 in. H x 0.85 in.W x 0.64 in. D
Weight 8.0 grams (0.28 oz)
Electrical Interface 21 pin 0.3 mm pitch ZIF connector
SE4500SR Decode Zone

in. cm
W
9 22.9
i
d
4.5 11.4 t
h
o
SE4500-SR 0 0 f
F
5 mil Code 39 4.5 11.4 i
2.1 7.5 e
6.67 mil PDF417 l
3.4 7.1 9 22.9 d
7.5 mil Code 39

* 10.6
10 mil PDF417
* 10.1
13 mil (100% UPC)

1.6 15.5
15 mil PDF417
* 14.7
15 mil Data Matrix

2.8 12.4
20 mil Code 39
* 24.7
In. 0 5 10 15 20 25
cm 0 12.7 25.4 38.1 50.8 63.5
Depth of Field
SE4600LR Long Range Imager
Input Voltages
3.3 V 10%, 75 mA max
VCC
1.8 V 10% or 3.3 V 10%, 30 mA max
VCC_INTFC
3.0 V - 8.4 V, 800 mA
VCC_ILLUM
3.3 V 10%, 70 mA max
VCC_SENSOR
VCC=VCC_SENSOR=VCC_INTFC =3.3 V VCC_ILLUM=5.0 V
Operating Mode Supply Low Power
Currents (Average)
750 A
Low Power
750 A
Idle
20 mA
Aim enabled, no illumina-
70 mA
tion or image acquisition
Image Acquisition
80 mA
Illumination Enabled
550 mA
Illumination and Aim
Enabled 600 mA
Maximum Sensor Power 40 mV p-p (10 Hz - 50 KHz) and
Supply Noise*
100 mV p-p (50KHz - 100 KHz) for bar code decoding
(VCC_SENSOR)
30 mV p-p (10 Hz - 100 KHz) for image capture
Optical Resolution Near sensor: 5 mil (Code 39), 10 mil (Data Matrix)
Far sensor: 15 mil (Code 39), 35 mil (Data Matrix)
Specular Dead Zone:
Illumination On Up to 20 depending on target distance and substrate glossiness
Illumination Off None
Skew Tolerance 60
Pitch Angle 60
Roll 360
Ambient Light Immunity 9000 ft. candles (96,900 lux)
(Sunlight)
Imaging Sensor:
Image Resolution 752 H x 480 V pixels (wide VGA)
Grey Scale 256 levels (8 bits per pixel)
Field of View (FOV) SE4600LR Far System: 11.6 horizontal, 7.4 vertical
SE4600LR Near System: 13 horizontal, 8.3 vertical
Aiming Element:
Visible Laser Diode (VLD) 655 5 nm (dominant wavelength)
Aiming Dot Optical Power 0.6 mW (typical)
Illumination System:
LEDs 625 5 nm (dominant wavelength)
Pattern Angle 16 horizontal x 11.5 vertical
Shock 2000 G 5% in the direction of any of the six principal axes applied
via
the mounting surface at -20 and 55 C for a period of 0.85 0.1

msec
2500 G 5% in the direction of any of the six principal axes applied

via
the mounting surface at 23 C for a period of 0.70 0.07 msec

Vibration Unpowered SE4600LR withstands a random vibration along each
of the X, Y, and Z axes for a period of one hour per axis (6 G rms),
defined as follows:
20 to 80 Hz Ramp up at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave

80 to 350 Hz 0.04 G2/Hz
350 Hz to 2 kHzRamp down at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave
ESD 2 kV @ connector
Laser Safety Class CDRH / IEC Class 2
LED Class IEC Class
Temperature:
Operating -20 to 55 C (-4 to 131 F)
Storage -40 to 70 C (-40 to 158F)
(-30 C (22 F) for Omnii XT15f Arctic variant)
Humidity:
Operating 95% RH, non-condensing at 55 C
Storage 85% RH, non-condensing at 70 C
Maximum Engine Dimen- 38.23 mm W x 19.34 mm H x 27.00 mm D
sions
1.51 in. W x 0.76 in. H x 1.06 in. D
Weight 45 - 52 grams (1.59 - 1.83 oz)
Electrical Interface 27 pin 0.3 mm pitch ZIF connector
NOTE: Environmental and/or tolerance parameters are not cumulative. A thermal analysis is
recommended if the application is subject to an extreme temperature environment.
SE4600LR Decode Zones

APPENDIX E OMNII SPECIFICATIONS
EOmnii Specifications
The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Wireless Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Cinterion, Model MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
802.11a/b/g/n Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Omnii Specifications E-3
The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545)
NOTE For Omnii freezer unit hardware specifications, please go to Appendix F: "Omnii
XT15f Freezer Unit (Model 7545XT)".
NOTE Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.
Hardware
Physical Dimensions
Width
At display: 100 mm (3.94 in)
At docking connector: 45 mm (1.77 in)
Depth
At display: 44 mm (1.73 in)
At docking connector: 45 mm (1.77 in)
Weight
Basic unit with battery: 610g (1.34 lb)
With battery, high visibility display, camera, Push-To-Talk speaker, EV15 1D imager: 636g (1.40 lb)
Processor and Memory

Texas Instruments AM3715 Sitara (OMAP3 compatible), ARM Processor 800 MHz.
RAM: 512 MB.
Flash ROM: 1 GB.
Operating System
User Interface
Colour/Touch Display: 9.4 cm (3.7 in) diagonal.
VGA (640 x 480) Transflective.
High Visibility option: superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd/m2 brightness.
Extreme Duty option: withstands 1.25 Joule impact, superior low temperature operation (to -20 C/-4 F),
with 160 cd/m2 brightness. Better abrasion resistance.
Keyboards: High reliability keypad ultra-white backlight.
Large selection of both alpha and numeric formats. See: http://www.zebra.com/US-EN/Prod-
uct+Lines/Psion/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_p_handheld for a list of available configurations.
Indicators and Controls: Four multi-colour LEDs indicate the status of the battery, application, radio,
and scanner.
Side Buttons: Volume, Scan, Enter, Vertical Scroll.
Voice, Audio & Feedback: High volume beeper: 95 dBA.
E-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Integrated microphone and speaker.

Optional Push-to-Talk speaker.
Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk VoIP over Wi-Fi or WWAN.
Vibration feedback.
Power Management
Battery Pack: 5000 mAh high capacity Lithium-ion (for battery specifications, see Lithium-ion Smart
Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) on page E-5).
Communication
Expansion Ports: MicroSD slot for Flash expansion (up to 32 GB).
Multiple Internal Multi-Function Expansion Interfaces with: TTL serial, USB host, GP10
Camera (optional)
Colour.
3 Megapixel.
Autofocus.
4x digital zoom.
Dual LED flash.
Video capable.
Enhanced Features
3 axis accelerometer.
Compass.
GPS.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F)
Storage Temperature: -40C to +60C (-40F to +140F)
Humidity: 5% to 95% RH non-condensing.
ESD: +/- 8 kV contact, +/- 15 kV air discharge.
Omnii RT15 Drop Durability:
1.5 m (5 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accessories); multiple 1.8 m (6 ft.) drops to
polished concrete.
Rain And Dust Resistance: IEC 60529, classification IP65.
Omnii XT15 Drop Durability:
1.7 m (5.6 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accessories); multiple 2.0 m (6.5 ft.) drops
to polished concrete.
Rain And Dust Resistance: IEC 60529, classification IP67.
Regulatory Approvals
Worldwide Safety, EMC, RF, Laser approvals
CE Mark
E Mark (vehicle cradles)
RoHS compliant
WEEE compliant
REACH compliant
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001)
For safety instructions, please see Lithium-ion Battery Safety Precautions in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer
Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191).
Model Number ST3001
Chemistry lithium-ion (Li-Ion)
Capacity 5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20C to 3.0 V
(min)
Voltage 3.7 V nominal (3.0 V min. to 4.2 V max.)
Cell Configuration 1S2P (2 parallel connected cells)
Max. Charge Voltage 4.2 V +/- 1%
Recommended Charge 5.0 hr - charging must stop.
Termination Timeout
Charge Temperature 0C to +40C (32F to +104F)
Discharge Temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F)
Storage Temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122 F). Storage at elevated
temperatures not recommended.
25C (77 F) recommended storage temperature.
Cycle Life 300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 70% of
nominal capacity based on 0.5C charge / 0.5C dis-
charge rates (to 3.0 V) @ 23C (73.4 F).
Wireless Radios
Cinterion, Model MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio
Manufacturer Cinterion, Model MC75i
Form Factor Quad-Band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 MHz
EDGE (E-GPRS) multi-slot class 12
GPRS multi-slot class 12
GSM release 99
Output Power Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM850
Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM900
Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1800
Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1900
Control via AT Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005
Commands
Supply Voltage Range 3.2 to 4.3 V
EDGE Data Transmis- EDGE class 12: max 236.8 kbps (downlink)
sion
Mobile station class B
Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1-9
GPRS Data Transmis- GPRS class 12
sion
Mobile station class B
PBCCH support
Coding schemes CS 1-4
CSD Data Transmission Up to 14.4 kbps, V.110
Non-transparent mode
SMS Point-to-point MO and MT
Text and PDU mode
Voice Triple-rate codec for HR, FR, and EFR
Adaptive multi-rate AMR
Basic hands-free operation
Echo cancellation
Noise reduction
Interfaces Hirose U.FL-R-SMT 50 ohm antenna connector
Antenna solder pad
Molex 80-pin board-to-board connector:
-Power supply
- Audio: 2x analog, 1x digital
- Serial interface (ITU-T V.24 protocol)
- SIM card interface 3 V, 1.8 V
Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio
Parameter Specifications
General
Frequency bands GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band, 850/900/1800/1900MHz
UMTS/HSPA+: Five band, 800/850/900/1900/2100MHz
GSM class Small MS
Output power (according to Class 4 (+33dBm 2dB) for EGSM850
Release 99)
Class 4 (+33dBm 2dB) for EGSM900
Class 1 (+30dBm 2dB) for GSM1800
Class 1 (+30dBm 2dB) for GSM1900
Class E2 (+27dBm 3dB) for GSM 850 8-PSK
Class E2 (+27dBm 3dB) for GSM 900 8-PSK
Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1800 8-PSK
Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1900 8-PSK
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 2100, WCDMA FDD Bd I
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 1900,WCDMA FDD Bd II
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 900, WCDMA FDD Bd VIII
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 850, WCDMA FDD Bd V
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 800, WCDMA FDD Bd VI
HSPA features
3GPP Release 6, 7 DL 14.4Mbps, UL 5.7Mbps
UE CAT. [1-6], 11, 12 supported
Compressed mode (CM) supported according to 3GPP
TS25.212
UMTS features
3GPP Release 4 PS data rate - 384 kbps DL / 384 kbps UL
CS data rate - 64 kbps DL / 64 kbps UL
GSM/GPRS/EGPRS fea-
tures
Data transfer GPRS:
Multislot Class 10
Full PBCCH support
Mobile Station Class B
Coding Scheme 1 - 4
EGPRS:
Multislot Class 10
EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK
Downlink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
Uplink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
SRB loopback and test mode B
8-bit, 11-bit RACH
PBCCH support
1 phase/2 phase access procedures
Link adaptation and IR
NACC, extended UL TBF
Mobile Station Class B
CSD:
V.110, RLP, non-transparent
14.4kbps
USSD
SMS Point-to-point MT and MO
GPS features
Protocol NMEA
Modes Assisted GPS (control plane AGPS, E911)
General Power saving modes
GPS tracking in parallel to 2G/3G diversity operation
Software
AT commands Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005, and proprietary Cinterion
Wireless Modules commands
SIM Application Toolkit SAT Release 99
Audio Audio speech codecs
GSM: AMR, EFR, FR, HR
3GPP: AMR
Speakerphone operation, echo cancellation, noise suppression
Interfaces
Antenna 50Ohms. Main GSM/UMTS antenna, UMTS diversity antenna,
GPS antenna (active/passive)
USB USB 2.0 High Speed (480Mbit/s) device interface
UICC interface Supported chip cards: UICC/SIM/USIM 3V, 1.8V
Special features
Phonebook SIM and phone
Antenna SAIC (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation) / DARP
(Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance)
RX diversity type 3i
802.11a/b/g/n Radio
Parameter Sub-parameter Specification
Manufacturer Murata, Model LBEH1Z9PFC
Form Factor Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi
802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio
Antenna Port 802.11b/g/n U.FL jack. Non-diversity.
Multiplexed between 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz) and Blue-
tooth radio
802.11a/n U.FL jack. Non-diversity.
Antenna Type 802.11b/g/n PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz
@ <2.5:1 VSWR
802.11a/n PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 5150-5860 MHz
@ <2.5:1 VSWR
Antenna Gain 802.11b/g/n 1.9 dBi
802.11a/n 1.9 dBi
E - 10 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Parameter Sub-parameter Specification

Transmit Power 802.11b +18 dBm typical, +19.5 dBm max
802.11g +13 dBm typical, +14.5 dBm max
802.11a +12 dBm typical, +13.5 dBm max
802.11n (2.4 +12 dBm typical, +13.5 dBm max
GHz)
802.11n (5 GHz) +12 dBm typical, +13.5 dBm max
Frequency 802.11b/g/n 2400-2483.5 MHz
Range 802.11a/n 5150-5350 MHz, 5480-5720 MHz and 5725-5845 MHz
Channels 802.11b/g/n 1 to 14.
Up to 14 channels (depending on country).
Only 3 channels are non-overlapping.
802.11a/n 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140
149, 153, 157, 161, 165
Up to 24 channels (depending on country).
All channels are non-overlapping.
RX Sensitivity 802.11b -78 dBm @ 11 Mbps
802.11g -67 dBm @ 54 Mbps
802.11a -67 dBm @ 54 Mbps
802.11n (2.4 -66 dBm @ 65 Mbps
GHz)
802.11n (5 GHz) -66 dBm @ 65 Mbps
Data Rates 802.11b 1,2,5.5,11 Mbps
802.11a/g 6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps
802.11n 6.5,13,19.5,26,39,52,58.5,65 Mbps
EVM 802.11b 32% max
802.11g -26 dB max
802.11a -26 dB max
802.11n (2.4 -29 dB max
GHz)
802.11n (5 GHz) -29 dB max
Bluetooth TI Wilink6 proprietary Wi-Fi-BT co-existent scheme.
Coexistence
Omnii Specifications E - 11
Bluetooth Radio
Manufacturer Murata, Model LBEH1Z9PFC
Form Factor Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n
and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio
Antenna Port U.FL jack (shared with Wi-Fi 802.11b/g/n radio)
Antenna Type PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz
@ <2.5:1 VSWR
Antenna Gain 1.9 dBi
Transmit Power 6.5 dBm typical, 8.5 dBm max
Frequency Range 2.400-2.4835 GHz
Channels 79
RX Sensitivity -90 dBm typical, -70 dBm max
Data Rates V1.2=732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric, 433.9 kbps
symmetric
V2.0=2 & 3 Mbps
802.11 Coexistence TI Wilink6 proprietary Wi-Fi-BT co-existent scheme.
CHAPTER F OMNII XT15F FREEZER
VARIANTS
OMNII XT15F FREEZER VARIANTS F
The Omnii XT15f Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545XT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3

Hardware Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
The Freezer Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) for Omnii Chiller Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh (ST3002) for Omnii Arctic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
Quick Defrost Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Suspend Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Scan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Heater Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Heater System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
Display and Scan Window Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
System Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants F - 3
The Omnii XT15f Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545XT)
NOTE Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.
The Omnii XT15f is a modular, industrial hand-held computer suitable for cold chain and extreme weather envi-
ronments. These units are equipped with heating hardware to prevent condensation from developing on or
inside the Omnii.
Two variants are available the Chiller and the Arctic. The Chiller model is condensing-resistant, and the
Arctic model is condensing-free. This variant is equipped with a heated scanner window and a standard 5000
mAh battery (model number ST3001). An optional freezer battery (model number ST3002) can be ordered for
the Chiller variant. The Omnii Arctic freezer variant is equipped with an optically bonded heated display
module, providing a condensation-free unit. It is only available with an ST3002 freezer battery.
NOTE The Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Zebra approved carrying case. Use of
non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
Model Variants
Omnii XT15f Arctic Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged, condensing-free) - Model 7545XT. This
model features a multi-core heater control logic board that dynamically heats the scan window and
LCD display.
Omnii XT15f Chiller Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged, condensing-resistant) - Model 7545XT. This
model features a single core heater control logic board dynamically heats the scan window.
Figure F-1 Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants
Omnii XT15f Omnii XT15f

34-key numeric keyboard 58-key alphanumeric keyboard
F-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Hardware Specifications
Physical Dimensions
Length: 226 mm (8.89 in)
Width: At display: 98 mm (3.86 in)
Depth: At display: 82 mm (3.2 in)
At grip area: 31 mm (1.22 in)
Weight: 834 g (1.8 lb) with SE965HP laser, ST3002 battery, and pistol grip
Barcode Scanner Options
NOTE Both Arctic and Freezer variants include a heated scan window for Frost Free Scan-
ning (FFS).
SE965HP 1D Standard Range Laser

SE1524ER 1D Extended Range Laser
SE4600LR 2D Long Range Imager
Display
3.7 VGA (640 x 480) Transflective Color/Touch Display
Chiller Variant:
Extreme Duty, designed for rugged environments with improved impact resistance (1.25 Joule impact),
better abrasion resistance, superior low temperature operation (to -20C / -4F), with 160 cd/m2
brightness.
Arctic Variant:
Extreme Duty, designed for rugged environments with improved impact resistance (1.25 Joule impact),
better abrasion resistance, superior low temperature operation (to -30C / -22F), with 160 cd/m2
brightness.
The optically bonded display module prevents the build-up of condensation/fogging between the display
and the touchscreen.
The display heater is responsible for maintaining a acceptable refresh rate in extreme cold environments.
Keyboard
Both variants include specially designed keyboards that resist freezing due to ice build-up in condensing
environments.
58-key full alphanumeric with 6 single-push Function keys.
34-key numeric with 12 single-push Function keys.
Power Management
Chiller Battery Pack: 5000 mAh high capacity Lithium-ion.
Optional 5300mAh high capacity smart freezer battery with specialized low temperature chemistry.
Arctic Battery Pack: 5300 mAh high-capacity Lithium-ion smart freezer battery with specialized low temper-
ature chemistry.
WARNING Powered cradles are designed to allow the Omnii to be powered by a

vehicle battery. The battery installed in the Omnii is also recharged by the
vehicle battery. This option accepts DC power sources over the range
11.5V to 30V.
For Omnii XT15f Chiller units, voltages above that require the use of the
power preregulator Model No. PS1350. However, Omnii XT15f Arctic units
operating in temperatures from -30C to +50C, require the use of the
power preregulator Model No. PS1370.
For detailed information, see ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation on

page 5-22
Environmental
Chiller Variant:
Humidity: 5% to 95% RH non-condensing (Condensation-Resistant).
Rain/Dust: Dual IP rating: IP67 and IP65 (IEC 60529)
Drop Rating: Multiple 2 m (6.5 ft) drops to polished concrete
Arctic Variant:
Humidity: Condensing (Condensation-Free using internal heaters).
Rain/Dust: Dual IP rating: IP67 and IP65 (IEC 60529)
Drop Rating: Multiple 2 m (6.5 ft) drops to polished concrete
Regulatory Approvals
Worldwide Safety, EMC, RF, Laser approvals
CE Mark
E Mark (vehicle cradles)
RoHS compliant
WEEE compliant
REACH compliant
The Freezer Keyboards

Two keyboard layouts are available for the Chiller and Arctic hand-held units. Both variants include specially
designed keyboards that resist freezing due to ice build-up in condensing environments.
Figure F-2 Freezer Keyboard Layouts
58-Key Full Alphanumeric Keyboard 34-Key Numeric Keyboard
[SCAN] Key
[FN] Keys
[SYM] key
[FN] Modifier key
[Enter/Power]
[SHIFT]
key
Modifier key
[Windows] key
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) for Omnii Chiller Model
The Omnii Chiller model is shipped with the standard ST3001 Lithium-ion Smart Battery. The ST3002 Arctic
battery is available as an option. See Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh (ST3002) for Omnii Arctic Model on
page F-7 for information about this battery.
For safety instructions, refer to Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191).
Model Number ST3001
Chemistry Lithium-ion (Li-Ion)
Capacity 5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20C to 3.0 V
(min)
Termination Timeout
Storage Temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122 F). Storage at elevated tem-
peratures not recommended.
25C (77 F) recommended storage temperature.
nominal capacity based on 0.5C charge / 0.5C discharge
rates (to 3.0 V) @ 23C (73.4 F).
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh (ST3002) for Omnii Arctic Model
NOTE This battery model is not restricted to the Omnii Arctic variant. It can be ordered as an
option for the Omnii Chiller variant.
The Omnii Arctic model is shipped with the Arctic ST3002 Lithium-ion Smart Battery.
For safety instructions, see Lithium-ion Battery Safety Precautions in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regu-
latory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191).
Model Number ST3002
Chemistry Lithium-ion (Li-Ion)
Capacity 5300 mAh nominal at 1000 mA. Discharge @ 20C to 2.75
V (min)
Termination Timeout
Storage Temperature -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F). Storage at elevated tem-
peratures not
recommended.
25C (77F) recommended storage temperature
nominal capacity
based on 2.5A - 4.20V charge / 2.5A - 2.75V discharge
rates @ 25C (77F).
Figure F-3 Arctic Freezer Battery and Safety Label
Quick Defrost Application

The Omnii XT15f is a freezer capable hand-held computer with integrated heaters designed to improve the
functionality and operation of the hand-held device in extreme cold environments. The Arctic variant has two
heaters; one for the display and one for the scanner window. The Chiller variant has only one heater which is
located on the scanner window. The Quick Defrost application is the nerve center of the heater related informa-
tion. The Setting tab allows the configuration of the suspend time of the heating system along with the scanner
window power setting. The Heater Info tab provide instantaneous heater information for each individual heater
and the overall heating system. For environmental specifications for this computer, see Hardware Specifica-
tions on page F-4.
To ensure proper operation of the hand-held device in a freezer environment, the surface temperature is
managed by the heating system to prevent the formation of external/internal condensation on critical modules.
The heating system consists of two heating elements; one for the display and one for the scan window.
Quick Defrost Settings

The individual heaters for the computer modules can be monitored, and the duration of time for them to remain
on during Suspend mode can be configured.
Tap on the Quick Defrost icon.

Settings
The Quick Defrost application opens in the Settings tab.
Suspend Threshold
The Suspend Threshold option allows you to maintain heat for a limited time when the computer enters
Suspend mode. Once the threshold is reached, the heater will stay off while the computer is in suspend.
To set the time, slide the trackbar to the desired time and click OK. Values range from 0 to 5 minutes.
NOTE Keep in mind that a longer suspend threshold will reduce the overall battery shift life.
Scan Window
The Scan Window option allows the user to set the power level for the periphery scan window heater. There
are two pull down options:
High power (default): This heating profile is designed for users who are in and out of the freezer frequently
(with a freezer dwell time of less than 20 minutes). This heating profile keeps a constant positive temperature
on the scan window, eliminating external and/or internal condensation from frequent transitions.
NOTE Keep in mind that this heating algorithm provides additional power at the expense of
the battery shift life.
Low power: This heating profile is designed for users who spend long durations in the freezer environment. It is
a less aggressive algorithm, compared to the High power mode, that maximizes battery shift life. This profile
addresses the formation of internal condensation to keep the scan window clear of condensation.
These two scan window power modes can be adjusted on the fly, providing the user with the needed flexibility
for optimal performance.
Heater Info
In the Quick Defrost dialog box, open the Heater Info tab. This dialog box allows you to monitor the status
of each heater and test the entire system.
F - 10 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Temperature Selection
You have the option of setting the display temperatures to Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Heater System
This section displays information on the heater system.
Status (Individual Heaters)

The LED state for this parameter indicates whether or not communication between the Omnii main system and
the heater control logic board has been successful.
LED Description
The communication between the heater control logic board and the Omnii main
system has been established successfully.
The communication between heater control logic board and the Omnii main
system has failed.
Voltage (Heater System)

This indicates the voltage applied to the heater system.
Current
This option indicates the total average current used by the heating system.
Power
This value represents the total power used by the heating system.
Temperature
This indicates the temperature measured inside the unit.
Humidity
This indicates the humidity measured inside the unit.
Display and Scan Window Heaters

This section displays information on the individual heaters.
NOTE If the scanner/imager is not connected, the scan window heater will be disabled
(greyed out).
Status
These LED status indicators report the heating mode for each individual heater.
LED Description
Blue indicates that the heating element is operating in full power mode.
Green indicates that the heating element is operating in sustaining mode.
Grey indicates that the heating element is off.
Red indicates that there is a hardware failure with the heater.
Current
This indicates the average current drawn at the moment for the individual heater.
Power
This indicates the power used at the moment for each individual heater.
Temperature
This shows the temperature measured near the heating element. Note that the temperature units (C or F) can
be selected at the top of the Heater Info tab. Once set, the selection is stored.
System Test
The system test feature allows the user to test the functionality of all available heaters (for approximately 20
seconds) to make sure that the heating system heaters and control board are working properly.
F - 12 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
System Properties
The System Properties window displays the heater software and hardware components.
Tap on Start>Settings>System>System Properties icon and scroll to Heater Info. The information also
includes heater identification, version or part numbers, and indicates if they are installed.
APPENDIX G WIRELESS WIDE AREA
NETWORK (WWAN)
GWireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Wireless WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

Navigation Bar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Establishing a Packet Data Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Disconnecting from a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Advanced Packet Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Manually Adding a New Modem Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
The Security Tab Entering a PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) G-3
Wireless WAN
Zebra offers the Cinterion MC75i EDGE WWAN radio and a Cinterion PH8-P HSPA+ WWAN radio. An Omnii
Hand-Held Computer equipped with a GSM/GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities. With this radio
and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data, and you use the Omnii voice option to place phone calls.
Navigation Bar Icons

Wireless WAN icons are displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen that identify the packet data
service and the signal strength.
When a modem detects that a packet data service is available, a letter is added to the signal strength icon indi-
cating the type of service. Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data
service is not available, or if it is available but not yet initialized.
The symbols in the navigation bar identifying the modem connection are as follows:
G - GSM/GPRS
E - GSM/EDGE
U - UMTS 3G
H - UMTS/HSPA+
Establishing a Packet Data Connection

To display the Data tab through which you can configure a connection:
Tap on the a Navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the hotkeys. Tap on the Phone Settings
hotkey.
First, tap here to display your options.
Next, tap on the Phone

Settings hotkey.
In the Phone Settings bubble, tap on Settings to display the phone setting tabs.
G-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Tap here to display the

phone setting tabs.
Scroll to the Data tab.
Figure G-1 Data Tab
By default the connection uses CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol); however, if your ISP
does not support CHAP, tapping in the box to the left of PAP only authentication for: directs the connection to
use PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) instead.
Tap on the Create button.

A home data connection is automatically set up.
To connect to the Internet, tap on the Start>Internet Explorer icon.
NOTE Any application that needs Internet access will establish a packet data con-
nection for example, e-mail.
Disconnecting from a Network

To disconnect from the network:
Tap on the navigation bar at the top of the screen, and then tap on the Phone Settings hotkey. In the
pop-up Phone bubble, tap on Wireless Manager.
Tap on the Menu button in the softkey bar at the bottom of the Wireless Manager screen, and choose Dis-
connect Cellular Data.
Advanced Packet Data Configuration

In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio and SIM are installed in your hand-held, setup is automatic.
Follow the steps outlined under the heading Establishing a Packet Data Connection on page G-3 to make a
connection. The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes.
Manual configuration should only be necessary if:
One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database. (The
database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)
An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords.
A very large site has its own Access Point Name (APN). Such connections must be configured manually.
A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be configured manually.
Manually Adding a New Modem Connection

Tap on Start>Settings>Connections folder icon. Tap on the Connections icon.
Choose Add a new modem connection.
In most cases, you should choose Add a new modem connection from ISP: WWAN - GPRS. However, if you
need to use a Proxy server, choose this option from My Work Network.
Enter a connection name (optional).

Choose Cellular Line (GPRS) from the Modem drop-down menu.
Tap on Next.
Type the Access Point Name, and tap on Next.

If required, type a User name and Password.

If you need to specify TCP/IP and Server information (i.e., you are using a static IP address) tap on the
Advanced... button to complete the necessary details.
Tap on Finish to create a new connection.
The Security Tab Entering a PIN

This option allows you to assign a PIN (Personal Identification Number) so that your SIM card is protected from
unauthorized use.
NOTE For details about assigning a PIN number, refer to Phone: Security Tab on
page 4-53.
Bands
By default, all frequency bands are enabled. Bands should not be disabled without knowledge about which
bands are used by your network; an incorrect setting will prevent the WWAN modem from finding the network.
Network Configuration
By default the radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks (allowed networks
are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement). You
may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you
might want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but
a foreign roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have GPRS
roaming agreements. In this case, youll need to manually select the network which you know supports GPRS
roaming.
Automatic network selection is enabled by default. You can also choose a network manually from the
drop-down menu.
NOTE Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks
have roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an Available
status, it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming
agreement covers GPRS.
Hearing Aid
This tab allows you to enable the hearing aid service.
APPENDIX H OMNII XT15NI
NON-INCENDIVE SAFETY
GUIDELINES
HOmnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines
Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Important Safety & Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3

Omnii XT15ni Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines H-3
Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Important Safety & Regulatory Information

The Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Hand-Held Computer has been qualified by UL LLC to the requirements of
the USA and Canada for use in Class I, Division 2-Groups A, B, C and D T6 environments.
The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Zebra. The use of
accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Zebra, may
void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the user's authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING This mark indicates that the user should read all included documentation
before use.
WARNING Ce marquage indique que l'usager doit, avant l'utilisation, lire toute la doc-
umentation incluse.
WARNING Explosion Hazard-Substitution of components may impair suitability for

Class I, Division 2 locations.
WARNING This unit has NO OPERATOR REPLACEABLE PARTS other than the battery
pack. Disassembly/assembly of the Omnii XT15ni must be performed by
trained Zebra service personnel at a Zebra service depot. No unauthorized
substitution of parts is allowed for the Omnii XT15ni hand-held.
Use ONLY the Zebra Model ST3001-NI battery pack in the Omnii XT15ni. No substitutions are
permitted without authorization from ZebraZebra personnel.
DO NOT CHARGE OR CHANGE BATTERIES in an area that is known to be hazardous.

Replace batteries in an area known to be non-hazardous.
EXPLOSION HAZARD. DO NOT REMOVE OR REPLACE LAMPS, FUSES OR PLUG-IN

MODULES (AS APPLICABLE) UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED OR THE
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE FREE OF IGNITIBLE CONCENTRATIONS OF FLAMMABLE
GASES OR VAPORS.
EXPLOSION HAZARD. DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE THE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS THE
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE FREE OF IGNITIBLE CONCENTRATIONS.
WARNING Exposure to some chemicals may degrade the sealing properties of mate-
rials used in the following devices: battery packs, housings, LCDs,
touchscreens, keypads.
Replacement of modules, housings, keypads, LCDs or touchscreens,

end-caps, pods or external connectors must only be performed at an
authorized Zebra service centre.
H-4 Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
The battery pack used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated.
Do not disassemble, heat above 100C (+212F) or incinerate. Dispose of used battery packs
promptly. Keep away from children.
WARNING The following additional warnings and cautions must be observed for the
safety of the operator and others in potentially hazardous locations:
The Omnii XT15ni must only be used when the ambient temperature is
between -20C and +50C (-4F and +122F).
The Omnii XT15ni may NOT be connected to any of its available accesso-
ries while in potentially hazardous locations. This includes anything that
uses the communications docking connector, headset, or microphone
jacks. All allowed connections must be made while outside of the poten-
tially hazardous location.
The use of Compact Flash, Secure Digital, and SIM Cards in the Omnii
XT15ni while in potentially hazardous locations is permitted as long as
these cards are not removed or changed while in the hazardous location.
Any connector cover removed while in ordinary locations must be rein-

stalled before entering a potentially hazardous location.
Omnii XT15ni Battery Information

The Omnii XT15ni hand-held operates with a specially adapted battery, model number ST3001-NI.
WARNING The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn
hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate,
disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Charge ONLY with Zebra Model
ST3001-NI. Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children.
Use ONLY Zebra battery pack Model ST3001-NI. Risk of fire or explosion if
incorrect battery pack is used. Promptly dispose of used battery pack accord-
ing to the instructions.
WARNING Le block-plies utilis dans cet appareil peut prendre feu, constituer un risque
de brlure chimique, exploser ou dgager des substances toxiques s'il est
manipul de faon inapproprie. Ne pas jeter au feu, dmonter ou chauffer
plus de 100C (212F). Ne charger qu'avec les dispositifs Zebra ST3001-NI. Ne
pas court-circuiter; cela pourrait causer des brlures. Garder hors de la porte
des enfants.
N'utiliser que le modle de bloc-plies Zebra ST3001-NI. L'utilisation d'un

mauvais bloc-plies pourrait constituer un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion.
Mettre rapidement au rebut tout bloc-plies us, conformment aux instructions.
INDEX
Index
Numerics audio indicators

adjusting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
1D internal scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-19 description of beep conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2D imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 AutoRestore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
34-key freezer keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
36-key keyboard
alpha keys, accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 B
uppercase letters, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 backlight
58-key freezer keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 Battery Power tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
A Backlight tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
backlight timeout values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
A.R.C WiFiConnect (private network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Backspace (DEL Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
About, Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 backup profile, creating (Total Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
About icon (software version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 backup Profile (Total Recall)
accessories AutoRestore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
carrying case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Clone to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
desktop docking stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
hand strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4, 5-5 Upload to A.R.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
holster, hard shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
pistol grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 backups, managing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
quad docking station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Bad Scan Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
vehicle cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Bar code
ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Decoding symbology predefined presets. . . . . . . . . B-3
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 bar code
AC Wall adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 appending to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) . . . . . . . . 4-69 displaying type of bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
All good and bad scan, vibrate settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4 Options tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
ALT Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Translation tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
appending to bar codes barcode
characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 barcode reader
approvals, Omnii freezer (including scanner) . . . . . . . . . F-5 integrated scanner, operation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
arrow keys bar code symbologies
moving the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 color camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20, B-21
Index - II Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

batteries operator controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Advanced (backlight) tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Battery (capacity) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Battery Details tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 ST4004 operator controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Battery Health tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 ST4004 quad docking station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Battery Power tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Suspend Threshold tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 clean start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52-6 Click Data (scanner double-click) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
charger safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Click Time (scanner double-click) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 5-9 clone (Total Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
charging with desktop docking station . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Clone to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Code Page
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Default Local ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 ISO-8859-1 Latin 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
specifications (ST3001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 code page (Data Handling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
ST3006 6-slot battery charger . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265-28 cold reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
swap time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 communication
Battery Power settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Baud, port replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Ethernet connection (quad docking station) . . . . . 5-17
beeper Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
adjusting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 connecting to a server with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
description of beep conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Connections
Bluetooth editing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
microphone, adjusting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 4-30
radio ISM band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 modem setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Bluetooth setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 network, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Network Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
GPRS setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Proxy Server setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Mode tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 VPN, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Paired tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Wi-Fi Configs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Servers tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Wireless Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Boot to BooSt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Connections (Internet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
built-in microphone, adjusting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Connections (settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Contacts (Start screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
adding new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
C working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
calendar Contrast adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
attendees, assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Control Panel
categories, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Predefined presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
creating & editing entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Copyright information, operating system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
deleting appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 cradle See also vehicle cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
reminders, creating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 CTRL Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
status, assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Custom preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
calibrating touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
D
camera, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
case, carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Data Bits, port replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 data entry modes
chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
desktop docking station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Data Handling (code page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
installing at a site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Data tab, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Index - III
debug (error handling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Add Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Decoding symbology file, renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Predefined symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3 File Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 3-26
Default copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4, B-5 copying a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Default identifier deleting file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Preset group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3 folders, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Default Local ASCII (Code Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 renaming file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Defrost applet (freezer variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 files & folders, managing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
DEL (Backspace) Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 folder, copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Demo Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 folder, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
desktop docking station See docking station, desktop . . . 5-10 folder, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
desktop screen (Home Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 folder, renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Device ID tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 freezer keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
display Freezer variant (XT15f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
backlight, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Function Keys
docking station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95-10 36-key keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105-14 59-key keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
G
operator controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 gang charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265-28
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Glossy surface
installation at site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
ST4004, quad Good and Bad Scan Vibrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
operator controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15, 5-16 Good Scan Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
uploading data using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 GPRS (bluetooth). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
docking stations GPS (external). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
quad docking station (ST4004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 GPS Settings (built-in profiles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
double-click Group, preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
appending characters to a decoded GSM UMTS radio modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-3
bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
scanner trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 H
Dr. Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63, 4-64, 4-65 hand strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
hand strap, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
E Hard Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
headset, adjusting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Heater Info (Heater Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows Vista and 7) Heater Settings
3-11 Heater Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows XP) . . . . . 3-9 heater settings (freezer variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
e-mail notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 holster, hard shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Encryption (storage card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Home
Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 appearance, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
ESC Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Home icon (Start screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Ethernet, connecting with docking station . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Home Screen (desktop screen). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Excel Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 customizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
External Power settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 hotkeys (navigation bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
HSP HFP (Headset Profile Hands-Free Profile) Service
F Commands (Bluetooth pairing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Index - IV Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
I Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

keyboard keys, freezer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Identifier keypad, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Default preset group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 keypad (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
imager Kiosk
two dimensional (2D) imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Imager Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Advanced tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
indicators Application tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
LED functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Phone tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
scanner message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18, 2-19, 2-20 Kiosk application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
softkey bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
input modes
handwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 L
typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 landscape orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
installation LED
hand strap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
pistol grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
vehicle cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 troubleshooting quad dock ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
integrated scanner option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Linear
Internet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Linear and PDF
browsing web sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Internet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Lithium-ion batteries
ISM band, Bluetooth radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 (code page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
K Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Low light
keyboard Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
36-key keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Low light near
alpha keys, 36-key keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
one shot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Low power
Scancode remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
keyboard keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
ALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 M
arrow keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Macro keys
Backspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 36-key keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 59-key keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 deleting a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
function keys, accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 executing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Macros menu, accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 recording and saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
navigating using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Managed Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
one shot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 mapping
SCAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Scancode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Matrix
shift-state indicator icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Storage Card tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Index - V
menus On & Off button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 one dimensional internal scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-19
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 OneShot Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
messages OneShot tab (modifier keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Scan Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Options tab (bar codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
scanner warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 orientation, screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Scan Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows Vista and 7) 3-11
Messaging Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows XP) . . . . . . . . 3-9
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-11
Microphone, adjusting volume (Built-in, Headset and
Bluetooth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
P
microSD Card, inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Paired tab (Bluetooth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 pairing Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Mobile Device Center (Windows), setting up . . . . . . . . 2-37 Parity, port replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Mode, Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Password (admin), changing (Kiosk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
modem setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 PDF and linear
Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
TCP_IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Personal apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
modifier keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 phone
OneShot Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Data tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
shift-state indicator icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 keypad tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Motion Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Network (phone), setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
phone keys (on the EP10 keyboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
N PIN, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
ring tone adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
name, assigning to WORKABOUT PRO3 . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 security tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
navigation bar Services, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 settings, managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 4-51
shift-state indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 sound tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
network, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 using (Windows Mobile 6.5 Professional) . . . 3-4, 4-51
network (phone), setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Voice Mail, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
non-incendive Omnii XT15ni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-3 Phone communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Note phone network, setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
recording a message (audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 picker cradle, installing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Pictures
soft keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
text, converting handwriting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 slide show, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Notification, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Notifications and Sound, defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
pistol grip, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
O port pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile . 4-19, portrait orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
4-21 Port Replicator settings (COM5 and COM6)
Omnii Baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5 Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
model numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xx Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
model numbers (freezer variants) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 Port B (COM6), Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
XT15f Freezer specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . .H-3 Trigger On Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Index - VI Omnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Postal Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Remote Desktop Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Power Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Advanced tab (backlight timeout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 resetting Omnii
Battery (capacity) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Boot to BooSt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Battery Details tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 clean start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Battery Health tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 cold reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Suspend Threshold tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Hard Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
to Port B (COM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 warm reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Power button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Restore Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Predefined preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 ring tone adjustments (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4, B-5
Glossy surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
S
Linear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 safety instructions
Linear and PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 battery charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Low light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Low light near . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 safety warning, scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Low power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Scancode remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Scan Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 SCAN Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Preset Scan Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 scanner
Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 one dimensional (1D) internal scanner . . . . 2-18, 2-19
Group default identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Predefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 techniques (scanning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Preset group troubleshooting tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Default identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 scanning
private network (WiFiConnect A.R.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 1D internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-19
Profile appending characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
restoring backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 Bad Scan Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
viewing backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 bar code settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
profile, creating backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99 Click Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 3-3 Data Handling (code page). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
minimizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 double-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Good and Bad Scan Vibrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
protective case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Good Scan Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
proxy server, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Options tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key) . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Scan Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Q Scan Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Scan Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Query Services (Bluetooth pairing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Scan Result Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Quick Defrost (heater settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Quick Defrost applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 Translations tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Quick Defrost Settings Scan Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Quick Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9 Scan Result Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
screen
stylus, using to navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
R touch pen, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
recalibrating touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Windows Embedded CE, navigating . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 scrolling, adjusting speed (Up_Down tab) . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
remapping security, setting up phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Scancode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Server Settings (modem setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Index - VII
Server tab (Bluetooth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Stop Bits, port replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile)4- Storage Card tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
18, 4-19, 4-21 stylus (touch pen), using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Surface
Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Glossy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Set for AutoRestore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 suspend (turn off screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 swap time (for battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Personal Tab symbologies, barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
OneShot tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Symbol SE4600 imager specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-16
Up_Down tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Symbol Soft Input Panel (figure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Task Manager, working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 synchronizing e-mail (Windows Vista and 7) . . . . . . . . 3-11
Settings tab (error level & log folder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 synchronizing e-mail (Windows XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Shell Settings (Kiosk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 System apps
Advanced tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Application tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Admin Password, changing (Kiosk) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Phone tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) . . . . 4-69
SHIFT Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
shift-state indicator, accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Battery Power settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
shift-state indicator (navigation bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
SIM card, inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
SM Toolkit UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Snap Modules Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
ST4000 (power only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 External Power settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
ST4001 (USB Host/Client) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6, A-4 GPS (external) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
ST4005 (USB DE9M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, A-4 GPS Settings (built-in profiles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
softkey (softkey bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Imagers Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
softkey bar Kiosk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Managed Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
soft keyboard icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 trigger mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
soft keyboard, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
soft keyboard icon (softkey bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
softkeys (softkey bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
T
Soft Scan Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 Tab Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
sound, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 task
Sound, setting events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 completed (marking as) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Sound and Notifications, defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24, 3-25
Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
SPACE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
specifications notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Omnii XT15f Freezer Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . F-3 sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Symbol SE4600 imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-16 Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 4-97
ST4000 Snap Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 TCP_IP Settings (modem setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
ST4001 Snap Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6, A-4 Terminal Services Client
ST4004 quad docking station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 session, disconnecting (without ending) . . . . . . . . 3-39
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 session, ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Total Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
ST4005 Snap Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, A-4 AutoRestore Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 backup profile, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Start screen backup Profile, restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Contacts icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 clone, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Home icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Clone to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Status tab, browsing error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 managing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Index - VIIIOmnii (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Guide
Restore Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 WWAN (Wireless Wide Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3

Upload to A.R.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 GSM UMTS radio modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
view Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
touch pen, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
touchscreen
X
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 XT15f Freezer variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 XT15ni (non-incendive) hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
stylus, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
touch pen, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
transcriber (handwritten note) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Translations parameters (bar codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
trigger mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Trigger On Sequence, port replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Trigger Press Type, Manage Triggers menu . . . . . . . 4-74
troubleshooting
ST40004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
troubleshooting tips (scanning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
U
Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Up_Down tab (scrolling adjustments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Upload to A.R.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Utilities tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
V
vehicle cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Version tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
vibrate, setting up for incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Vibrates, Good and Bad Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
video recorder, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Videos and Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Voice
phone communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
voice mail, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
VPN connection, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
W
warm reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
WiFiConnect A.R.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Windows Embedded CE, navigating in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Windows Mobile Device Center, setting up . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Wireless Zero Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Word Mobile
data entry modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Word See Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Zebra and the Zebra head graphic are registered trademarks of ZIH Corp. The Symbol logo
is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies, Inc., a Zebra Technologies company.
2015 Symbol Technologies, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
8000225-001 Revision A April 2015

Omnii XT15 User Guide

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Omnii XT15 User Guide

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Omnii

This user manual supports Model Numbers:

Change Date Description

Rev -001a 04/2015 Rebrand for Zebra.

About This Manual .......................................................................................................................... xix

Chapter 1: Basic Operation

Chapter 2: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Standard Keys ................................................................................................................................2-7

Zebra Software Advantage.............................................................................................................4-5

Program Buttons Tab .......................................................................................................... 4-45

Kiosk Menu ......................................................................................................................... 4-77

Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 .............................................................. 5-10

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Appendix B: Imagers Applet

Appendix C: Scanner Settings

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications

Chapter F: Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants

Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)

Appendix H: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

About This Manual

Chapter : About This Guide

provides a basic overview of the Omnii Hand-Held.

Chapter 1: Basic Operation

Chapter 2: Getting To Know Your Omnii

Appendix A: Port Pinouts

Appendix B: Imagers Applet

describes in detail the Omnii imager settings.

Appendix C: Scanner Settings

describes the barcode options.

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications

lists the specifications for the Omnii scanners and imagers.

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications

Appendix F: Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants

Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)

provides WWAN configuration information.

Appendix H: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines

NOTE Notes highlight additional helpful information.

IMPORTANT These statements provide particularly important instructions or

WARNING These statements provide critical information that may prevent

Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer

NOTE For product specifications, refer to Appendix E: Omnii Specifications.

Processor and Memory

Device Management and Utilities

NOTE 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.

Figure 1 Omnii XT15 and Omnii RT15 Variants

Omnii XT15 Omnii RT15

Figure 2 Bottom View (Docking Connector)

Figure 3 Top View (Scanner Window)

Figure 4 Omnii XT15f Freezer Variant

Omnii XT15f Omnii XT15f

WARNING Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than

Figure 5 Laser Warning Label

This label is affixed below the scanner window.

Figure 6 SE955 Laser Warning Label

This label is affixed below the scanner window.

Figure 7 SE965 and SE4500 Laser Warning Label

Figure 8 LED Radiation Notice Label

This product contains an imager

7545 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT (IEC)

Figure 9 SE4600 Laser Warning Label